User Guide

Streaming AV Product

SMP 300 Series Streaming Media Processor

68-2238-01 Rev. I 05 19 Safety Instructions

Safety Instructions • English Istruzioni di sicurezza • Italiano

WARNING: This symbol, ,when used on the product, is intended AVVERTENZA: Il simbolo, , se usato sul prodotto, serve ad avvertire to alert the user of the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within l’utente della presenza di tensione non isolata pericolosa all’interno del the product’s enclosure that may present a risk of electric shock. contenitore del prodotto che può costituire un rischio di scosse elettriche.

ATTENTION: This symbol, , when used on the product, is intended ATTENTZIONE: Il simbolo, , se usato sul prodotto, serve ad to alert the user of important operating and maintenance (servicing) avvertire l’utente della presenza di importanti istruzioni di funzionamento e instructions in the literature provided with the equipment. manutenzione nella documentazione fornita con l’apparecchio.

For information on safety guidelines, regulatory compliances, EMI/EMF Per informazioni su parametri di sicurezza, conformità alle normative, compatibility, accessibility, and related topics, see the Extron Safety and compatibilità EMI/EMF, accessibilità e argomenti simili, fare riferimento alla Guida Regulatory Compliance Guide, part number 68-290-01, on the Extron website, alla conformità normativa e di sicurezza di Extron, cod. articolo 68‑290‑01, sul www.extron.com. sito web di Extron, www.extron.com.

Sicherheitsanweisungen • Deutsch Instrukcje bezpieczeństwa • Polska

WARNUNG: Dieses Symbol auf dem Produkt soll den Benutzer OSTRZEŻENIE: Ten symbol, , gdy używany na produkt, ma na celu darauf aufmerksam machen, dass im Inneren des Gehäuses dieses poinformować użytkownika o obecności izolowanego i niebezpiecznego Produktes gefährliche Spannungen herrschen, die nicht isoliert sind und napięcia wewnątrz obudowy produktu, który może stanowić zagrożenie die einen elektrischen Schlag verursachen können. porażenia prądem elektrycznym.

VORSICHT: Dieses Symbol auf dem Produkt soll dem Benutzer in UWAGI: Ten symbol, , gdy używany na produkt, jest przeznaczony do der im Lieferumfang enthaltenen Dokumentation besonders wichtige ostrzegania użytkownika ważne operacyjne oraz instrukcje konserwacji Hinweise zur Bedienung und Wartung (Instandhaltung) geben. (obsługi) w literaturze, wyposażone w sprzęt.

Weitere Informationen über die Sicherheitsrichtlinien, Produkthandhabung, Informacji na temat wytycznych w sprawie bezpieczeństwa, regulacji wzajemnej EMI/EMF-Kompatibilität, Zugänglichkeit und verwandte Themen finden Sie in zgodności, zgodność EMI/EMF, dostępności i Tematy pokrewne, zobacz Extron den Extron-Richtlinien für Sicherheit und Handhabung (Artikelnummer bezpieczeństwa i regulacyjnego zgodności przewodnik, część numer 68-290- 68-290-01) auf der Extron-Website, www.extron.com. 01, na stronie internetowej Extron, www.extron.com.

Instrucciones de seguridad • Español

ADVERTENCIA: Este símbolo, , cuando se utiliza en el producto, avisa al usuario de la presencia de voltaje peligroso sin aislar dentro del

producto, lo que puede representar un riesgo de descarga eléctrica.

ATENCIÓN: Este símbolo, , cuando se utiliza en el producto, avisa al usuario de la presencia de importantes instrucciones de uso y

mantenimiento recogidas en la documentación proporcionada con el

equipo.

Para obtener información sobre directrices de seguridad, cumplimiento de normativas, compatibilidad electromagnética, accesibilidad y temas relacionados, consulte la Guía de cumplimiento de normativas y seguridad de Extron, referencia 68-290-01, en el sitio Web de Extron, www.extron.com.

Instructions de sécurité • Français

AVERTISSEMENT : Ce pictogramme, , lorsqu’il est utilisé sur le produit, signale à l’utilisateur la présence à l’intérieur du boîtier du produit 安全说明 • 简体中文 d’une tension électrique dangereuse susceptible de provoquer un choc électrique. 警告: 产品上的这个标志意在警告用户该产品机壳内有暴露的危险 电压, 有触电危险。 ATTENTION : Ce pictogramme, , lorsqu’il est utilisé sur le produit, signale à l’utilisateur des instructions d’utilisation ou de maintenance 注意: 产品上的这个标志意在提示用户设备随附的用户手册中有 importantes qui se trouvent dans la documentation fournie avec le 重要的操作和维护(维修)说明。 matériel. 关于我们产品的安全指南、遵循的规范、EMI/EMF 的兼容性、无障碍 Pour en savoir plus sur les règles de sécurité, la conformité à la réglementation, 使用的特性等相关内容,敬请访问 Extron 网站 , www.extron.com,参见 la compatibilité EMI/EMF, l’accessibilité, et autres sujets connexes, lisez les Extron 安全规范指南,产品编号 68-290-01。 informations de sécurité et de conformité Extron, réf. 68‑290-01, sur le site Extron, www.extron.com. 安全記事 • 繁體中文 안전 지침 • 한국어

警告: 若產品上使用此符號,是為了提醒使用者,產品機殼內存在著 경고: 이 기호 가 제품에 사용될 경우, 제품의 인클로저 내에 있는 可能會導致觸電之風險的未絕緣危險電壓。 접지되지 않은 위험한 전류로 인해 사용자가 감전될 위험이 있음을 경고합니다.

注意 若產品上使用此符號,是為了提醒使用者,設備隨附的用戶手冊中有 重要的操作和維護(維修)説明。 주의: 이 기호 가 제품에 사용될 경우, 장비와 함께 제공된 책자에 나와 있는 주요 운영 및 유지보수(정비) 지침을 경고합니다. 有關安全性指導方針、法規遵守、EMI/EMF 相容性、存取範圍和相關主題的詳細資 訊,請瀏覽 Extron 網站:www.extron.com,然後參閱《Extron 安全性與法規 안전 가이드라인, 규제 준수, EMI/EMF 호환성, 접근성, 그리고 관련 항목에 遵守手冊》,準則編號 68-290-01。 대한 자세한 내용은 Extron 웹 사이트(www.extron.com)의 Extron 안전 및 규제 준수 안내서, 68-290-01 조항을 참조하십시오.

安全上のご注意 • 日本語

警告: この記号 が製品上に表示されている場合は、筐体内に絶縁されて いない高電圧が流れ、感電の危険があることを示しています。

注意: この記号 が製品上に表示されている場合は、本機の取扱説明書に 記載されている重要な操作と保守(整備)の指示についてユーザーの注意 を喚起するものです。

安全上のご注意、法規厳守、EMI/EMF適合性、その他の関連項目に つ い て は 、エク スト ロ ン の ウェブ サ イト www.extron.com よ り『 Extron Safety and Regulatory Compliance Guide』 ( P/N 68-290-01) をご覧ください。

Copyright © 2016-2019 Extron Electronics. All rights reserved. Trademarks All trademarks mentioned in this guide are the properties of their respective owners. The following registered trademarks(®), registered service marks(SM), and trademarks(TM) are the property of RGB Systems, Inc. or Extron Electronics (see the current list of trademarks on the Terms of Use page at www.extron.com): Registered Trademarks (®) Extron, Cable Cubby, ControlScript, CrossPoint, DTP, eBUS, EDID Manager, EDID Minder, Flat Field, FlexOS, Glitch Free. Global Configurator, Global Scripter, GlobalViewer, Hideaway, HyperLane, IP Intercom, IP Link, Key Minder, LinkLicense, LockIt, MediaLink, MediaPort, NetPA, PlenumVault, PoleVault, PowerCage, PURE3, Quantum, Show Me, SoundField, SpeedMount, SpeedSwitch, StudioStation, System INTEGRATOR, TeamWork, TouchLink, V‑Lock, VideoLounge, VN‑Matrix, VoiceLift, WallVault, WindoWall, XTP, XTP Systems, and ZipClip Registered Service Mark(SM) : S3 Service Support Solutions Trademarks (™) AAP, AFL (Accu‑Rate Frame Lock), ADSP (Advanced Digital Sync Processing), Auto‑Image, AVEdge, CableCover, CDRS (Class D Ripple Suppression), Codec Connect, DDSP (Digital Display Sync Processing), DMI (Dynamic Motion Interpolation), Driver Configurator, DSP Configurator, DSVP (Digital Sync Validation Processing), eLink, EQIP, Everlast, FastBite, FOX, FOXBOX, IP Intercom HelpDesk, MAAP, MicroDigital, Opti‑Torque, PendantConnect, ProDSP, QS‑FPC (QuickSwitch Front Panel Controller), Room Agent, Scope‑Trigger, ShareLink, SIS, Simple Instruction Set, Skew‑Free, SpeedNav, Triple‑Action Switching, True4K, Vector™ 4K , WebShare, XTRA, and ZipCaddy FCC Class A Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. The Class A limits provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference. This interference must be corrected at the expense of the user.

NOTE: For more information on safety guidelines, regulatory compliances, EMI/ EMF compatibility, accessibility, and related topics, see the Extron Safety and Regulatory Compliance Guide on the Extron website.

Battery Notice This product contains a battery. Do not open the unit to replace the battery. If the battery needs replacing, return the entire unit to Extron (for the correct address, see the Extron Warranty section on the last page of this guide). CAUTION: Risk of explosion. Do not replace the battery with an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. ATTENTION : Risque d’explosion. Ne pas remplacer la pile par le mauvais type de pile. Débarrassez-vous des piles usagées selon le mode d’emploi.

VCCI-A Notice この装置は、クラスA情報技術装置です。 この装置を家庭環境で使用すると、電波妨害を引き 起こすことがあります。 その場合には使用者が適切な対策を講ずるよう要求されることがあります。 VCCI-A

Conventions Used in this Guide

Notifications The following notifications are used in this guide: ATTENTION: • Risk of property damage. • Risque de dommages matériels.

NOTE: A note draws attention to important information.

TIP: A tip provides a suggestion to make working with the application easier.

Software Commands Commands are written in the fonts shown here: ^AR Merge Scene,,0p1 scene 1,1 ^B 51 ^W^.0 [01] R 0004 00300 00400 00800 00600 [02] 35 [17] [03] E X! *X1&* X2)* X2#* X2! CE}

NOTE: For commands and examples of computer or device responses used in this guide, the character “0” is used for the number zero and “O” is the capital letter “o.”

Computer responses and directory paths that do not have variables are written in the font shown here: Reply from 208.132.180.48: bytes=32 times=2ms TTL=32 C:\Program Files\Extron Variables are written in slanted form as shown here: ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx —t SOH R Data STX Command ETB ETX

Selectable items, such as menu names, menu options, buttons, tabs, and field names are written in the font shown here: From the File menu, select New. Click the OK button.

Specifications Availability Product specifications are available on the Extron website, www.extron.com.

Extron Glossary of Terms A glossary of terms is available at http://www.extron.com/technology/glossary.aspx.

Contents

Introduction...... 1 Advanced Configuration Menu...... 41 About this Guide...... 1 Comm Settings (View and Edit) Menu...... 44 About the SMP 300 Series...... 1 Status Menu...... 46 PC Requirements...... 3 Exit Menu...... 46 Extron LinkLicense...... 3 Front Panel Lockout (Executive Modes)...... 47 Licensed Third-party Software...... 4 Alarms...... 47 General Product Overview...... 6 Input...... 6 Web-Based User Interface...... 49 Encoding and Output...... 6 Overview of the Web-Based User Interface...... 49 File Storage...... 7 Web Browser Requirements...... 50 Control Options...... 8 Turning Off Compatibility Mode...... 50 Recordings...... 8 Web-Based User Interface Help Files...... 51 Features...... 9 Accessing the Web-Based User Interface...... 51 Page Overview...... 52 Installation...... 14 Logging Out and Logging In...... 54 Mounting the SMP 300 Series...... 14 AV Controls Panel...... 55 Rear Panel Overview...... 14 AV Controls Panel Features...... 55 Power Connection...... 15 Start an Ad Hoc Recording...... 59 Control System and External Recording Controls...... 61 Device Connections...... 15 Scheduled Events...... 63 Input Connections...... 16 Recording Calendar...... 63 Output Connections...... 16 Schedule Settings...... 64 Rear Panel Reset...... 18 Publish Settings...... 65 Configuration...... 66 Configuration Tab Features...... 67 Front Panel Operation...... 20 Input/Output Settings...... 68 Front Panel Features...... 20 Image Settings...... 73 Layout Presets (For Composite Mode Only)...... 22 Encoding & Layout...... 75 Power Up Procedure...... 24 Users and Roles...... 80 Front Panel Menu Operation...... 25 Alarms and Traps...... 82 Menu Navigation...... 25 System Settings...... 83 Menu Overview...... 25 Advanced Features...... 87 Presets Menu...... 26 File Management...... 89 Picture Control Menu...... 29 Add a Network Share...... 90 Record and Stream Configuration Menu...... 31 Upload and Download Files Using Input Configuration Menu...... 37 an SFTP Client...... 90 Background Recall Menu (For composite mode only)...... 41

SMP 300 Series • Contents vi Troubleshooting...... 91 DataViewer...... 130 Features of the Troubleshooting Page...... 91 What is an IP Address?...... 132 Status ...... 92 Private and Public Address Ranges...... 133 Logs...... 93 Multicast Address Range...... 133 Alarms...... 94 Subnet Mask...... 133 Diagnostic Tools...... 95 Port Number...... 133 System Resets...... 96 Choosing an IP Address...... 134 Mirroring LinkLicense...... 97 Using the Ping Utility to Test Communications...... 135 FlexOS Applications...... 98 Multicast IP Addressing for Multiple SMP 300 Series Installations...... 135 About the FlexOS App - Streaming Method Overview...... 136 Digital I/O Configurator...... 98 Protocols Used for Streaming...... 136 Streaming Playback Methods...... 139 Remote Communication and Control...... 99 Streaming Capabilities and Connection Options...... 99 System Scalability...... 141 RS-232 Port...... 99 Playing a Pull Stream Using Front Panel Configuration Port...... 99 VLC Media Player...... 143 Ethernet (LAN) Port...... 100 Playing a Push Stream Using Stream Host-to-device Communications...... 101 Announcement Protocol (SAP)...... 144 SMP 300 Series-initiated Messages...... 101 Playing a Pull Stream Using Password Information...... 102 QuickTime Media Player...... 146 Error Responses...... 102 Estimating Storage Requirements Using the Command and Response Tables...... 102 for a Recording...... 147 Command and Response Tables...... 106 Estimating Storage per Recording Hour...... 147 Front Panel Menu Diagrams...... 149 Front Panel Menu Diagrams Reference Information...... 128 (Record/Stream Configuration)...... 150 Mounting the SMP 300 Series...... 128 Tabletop Use...... 128 Glossary...... 151

Furniture Mounting...... 128 Table or Wall Mounting...... 128 Rack Mounting...... 128 Supported File Types, Drive Formats, Browsers, and Browser Plugins...... 129 File Formats...... 129 Drive Formats...... 129 Browsers...... 130 Browser Plugins...... 130

SMP 300 Series • Contents vii Introduction

This section gives an overview of the user guide and describes the SMP 300 Series and its features. Topics that are covered include: • About this Guide • About the SMP 300 Series • PC Requirements • Licensed Third-party Software • Extron LinkLicense • General Product Overview • Features

About this Guide This guide contains installation, configuration, and operating information for the SMP 351, SMP 351 3G-SDI, SMP 352, and SMP 352 3G-SDI. In this guide: • “SMP 300 Series”, “SMP models”, or “the SMP” refer to the SMP 351, SMP 351 3G-SDI, SMP 352, SMP 352 3G-SDI models. • “Codec” refers to the H.264 / MPEG-4 AVC codec. • “Stream” can refer to audio, video, or both that is transmitted by the SMP. • “UI” and “web UI” refer to the Web-based User Interface.

About the SMP 300 Series The Extron SMP 300 Series is a compact, high performance H.264 recording and streaming processor that provides the ability to record a presentation and output an HDMI signal to a local display, and, if needed, stream the AV content live while recording. Six versions of the SMP models, with varying internal file storage capacity, are available: • SMP 351 (150 GB and 480 GB) • SMP 351 3G-SDI (150 GB and 480 GB) • SMP 352 (480 GB) • SMP 352 3G-SDI (480 GB) NOTE: The SMP models have similar front and rear panel features and function exactly the same. The SMP 351 3G-SDI and SMP 352 3G-SDI support a 3G-SDI video input.

Figure 1 on the next page shows an SMP 351 application that utilizes Channel A HDMI and an audio loop-out for local display of the computer input. The presentation is then streamed to an SMD 101. Figure 2 on the next page shows a typical SMP 352 application featuring a computer input with embedded audio, an SDI camera input, and a wireless microphone for audio. The presentation is streamed to a SMD 101 and the SMP 352 records both channels and publishes to the Kaltura cloud hosted service. The SMP 351 models can be upgraded to support SMP 352 features through a LinkLicense upgrade.

SMP 300 Series • Introduction 1 1 2

Figure 2. Figure 1. Typical SMP 352Application Typical SMP351Application SMP 300Series •Introduction 2

PC Requirements Extron LinkLicense • • • The PCrequirements toaccessthedefaultwebpagesofSMPare listedbelow. • LinkLicense upgradesavailablefortheSMP300Series includethefollowing: from theSMPandactivatedasneedarises. enhance thecapabilitiesofExtron products. EachLinkLicensecanbepurchased separately An Extron LinkLicenseunlocksfeatures thataddconvenience,expandsystemoptions,and Web Browsers • Operating Systems • Hardware • • • • 3G-SDI intothecorresponding SMP352model. Dual Recording Upgrade • • • • • • NOTE: Microsoft 2.0 GHzdual-core processor workflow. Enables streaming presets thatincrease functionalityandprovide asimplified and treble controls, filtering,anddynamics. Unlocks advancedaudioDSP capabilitiesforchannelBdualmonoinputs,bass two videochannels(dualchannel mode). the dualrecording feature tocreate synchronized recordings andstreams with the for simultaneousstreaming andrecording (compositerecording mode)orenabling stream settingsforeachchannel.Usershavethechoiceofcreating asinglelayout different videosources. Theupgradeprovides independentarchive andconfidence Enables theSMP351tocreate independentrecordings andtwostreams from two This licenseisenabledonceandlastsforthelifeof product. • browser client: Additionally, thedevicewebUIiscompliant,butnotfullyfeatured, withtheinternal Apple Google Microsoft Microsoft Edge™ player andisnotsupportedbyMicrosoft • • Edge™, orApple NOTE: NOTE: VLC mediaplayer)andconnecttothestream from theSMP. Open astandalone,third-party opensource videoplayer(suchasVideoLAN Use adifferent browser QTWeb v4.x (see

® The preview videointhe ® Safari ® Chrome™ version48orhigher

Turning Off CompatibilityMode ® ® Windows Internet Explorer Internet Safari isthepreferred browser formacOSoperatingsystems. If youare Explorer, usingInternet off compatibilitymodemustbeturned ® version9orhigher(formacOS ® version44orhigher ® Safari ® XPorhigher —ThisLinkLicenseupgradesanSMP351or ® . To seeapreview ofthecurrent stream either: or ® version11orhigher(forWindows AV

Controls ® Internet Explorer Internet • Mac onpage 50 paneloftheSMPusesanHTML5 ® operatingsystems) SMP 300Series •Introduction ® OS ® ). X ® ® 10.6orhigher v.11, Microsoft ® operatingsystems) 3

Licensed Third-party Software fontconfig flex file fbset expat eventlog eudev ethtool e2fsprogs dosfstools dbus cracklib cjson bzip2 busybox avahi aufs2-util alsa-utils alsa-lib ExtJS 4 Package AFLv2.1 orGPLv2 LGPLv2.1 MIT bzip2 license GPLv2 LGPLv2.1 GPLv2 GPLv2 LGPLv2.1 Sencha Commercial License License fontconfig license FLEX BSD-3c BSD-2c, onefileBSD-4c, file GPLv2 MIT BSD-3c GPLv2 GPLv2 libet MIT-like withadvertisingclause GPLv2, libuuidBSD-3c,libssand GPLv2 • The followingtableliststhelicensedthird-party software usedbytheSMP models. Help File For more informationoneach LinkLicense,seethe • Licensed Third-party Software UsedintheSMP300Series NOTE: • Kaltura Features Upgrade • • • • Horizontal VideoMirroring Upgrade • • without notice. An annually-renewable supportlicense. issued. Enables theusertosetadelaystartrecording aftertherecord commandis Enables theusertoadjustminimumavailablerecording time. on theboard. Theimageis flippedtoallowthewritingbedisplayedcorrectly. presenter tostandbehind a glassmarkerboard andfacethecamera,whilewriting Enables thefeature thatflipsthevideohorizontallybefore theencoding,allowinga An annually-renewable license Enables theunittostream livemediatoKalturausingRTMP. Enables theabilitytoschedulerecordings directly from Kaltura.

. Licensed third-party software usedbytheSMP modelsissubjecttochange — netsnmp netcat neon ncurses mxml mtd lzo lvm2 luastruct luasocket luaposix luaexpat luacrypto lua-cjson luabitop lua ltrace lsof lshw logrotate Package — SMP 300SeriesEmbeddedWeb Pages Various BSD-like GPLv2 tests) LGPLv2 (library),GPLv2(manual and MIT withadvertisingclause LGPLv2 withexceptions GPLv2 GPLv2 GPLv2 LGPLv2.1 MIT MIT MIT MIT MIT MIT MIT MIT GPLv2 lsof license GPLv2 GPLv2 License SMP 300Series •Introduction 4

lm-sensors Linux-PAM libxml2 libv4l libusb libtirpc libssh2 libpng libpcap libgpgme libgpg-error libglib2 libffi libfcgi libevent libelf libdnet libdaemon libcurl libcgicc libassuan kmod jpeg-turbo iptables iproute2 iostat ifplugd i2c-tools heirloom-mailx gnupg freetype Package LGPLv2.1 BSD-3c BSD libpng license BSD-3c LGPLv2.1 LGPLv2.1 LGPLv2 MIT fcgi license BSD-3c, OpenBSD LGPLv2 BSD-3c LGPLv2.1 ISC LGPLv2.1 LGPLv2.1 (Libraryonly) LGPLv2.1 jpeg-license (BSD-3c-like) GPLv2 GPLv2 GPL GPLv2 GPLv2, GPLv2(py-smbus) Group (hmac),MPLv1.1(nss) Security (md5),NetworkWorking (imap_gssapi),RSAData OpenVision BSD-4c, Bellcore (base64), GPLv2 Dual FTL/GPLv2 License GPLv2 libsensors LGPLv2.1,programs BSD-3c MIT Unknown Licensed Third-party Software UsedintheSMP300Series qjson pv psmisc procps popt pcre openssl openssh ntp nmap nginx nfs-utils Package zlib xinetd vsftpd util-linux usbutils tzdata tcpdump sysstat syslog-ng strace sqlite spawn-fcgi socat smartmontools rpcbind rapidjson qwt qt LGPLv2.1 Artistic-2.0 GPLv2 GPLv2, libproc andlibpsLGPLv2 MIT BSD-3c OpenSSL orSSLeay BSD-3c, BSD-2c,PublicDomain ntp license GPLv2 BSD-2c GPLv2 License zlib license xinetd license GPLv2 LGPLv2.1, libuuidBSD-3c GPLv2, BSD-4c,libblkidandlibmount GPLv2 Public domain BSD-3c GPLv2 (modules) LGPLv2.1 (syslog-ngcore), GPLv2 BSD-3c Public domain BSD-3c GPLv2 GPLv2 BSD-3c MIT Unknown LGPLv2.1 withexceptions SMP 300Series •Introduction 5

General Product Overview Encoding andOutput Input output fordisplayonanyHDMIdisplay, supportingresolutions upto1920x1080at60Hz. Series alsooutputshighqualityencodedHDMIvideowithembeddedaudioonasingle live streaming). Thevideooutputcanbescaledanditsaspectratiomodified.SMP 300 mode forlowerresolution streams (forpreview withinitsembeddedwebpagesandoptional high qualitystreams (forrecording andoptionallivestreaming), andonConfidenceencoding Encoding &Layout layout andencodedintostreams. TheSMP 300Serieshastwoencodingtypes(see metadata (descriptiveinformationaboutdatacontent)are combinedinauser-configurable In compositemode,signalsfrom thetwoinputchannels,abackground image,and • • defaults tobothrecord andstream theselectedinput. resolution, framerate,bitandindependentstreaming protocol methods.Theoutput SMP 352 supportschannelAandBarchive streaming. Eachcanhaveadifferent The SMPmodelssupportmultiplesimultaneousstream encoders.Additionally, the • • • connectors. accept digitalaudioembeddedonHDMIsignalsoranaloginputviacaptivescrew SMP 351and352withtheadditionof3G/HD/SDIinput(input5).Allmodels composite videoinput.The The NOTE: Confidence • • recording andstreaming. Archive One videoandoneaudioinputcanbeselectedactiveperchannel. (3G/HD/SDI) are grouped aschannelB. Input 3(componentorcompositevideo),input4(HDMI),andoptional5 Input 1(HDMI)andinput2are grouped aschannelA. output intheblockdiagram SMP 300Series Channel Bdefault:Notenabled Channel Adefault:Pull,unicastRTP/UDP

Signal flowforbothchannelAandBcanbefollowedfrom inputto (channelAandchannelBindualmode)—Highestqualityforboth —Forstreaming only(default:Pull,unicastRTP/UDP). onpage 75 canacceptuptothree HDMIinputsandonecomponentor SMP 3513G-SDI ). TheSMPcanencodeonarchive encoding modefor figure 3 onthenextpage. and SMP 3523G-SDI SMP 300Series •Introduction are identicaltothe 6 3

1 • •

Ar 5: 3G/SDI/HD-SDI 4: HDMI/DVI 3: Analog 2: HDMI/DVI 1: HDMI/DVI Inputs File Storage models withLinkLicense. for SMP352modelsand351 two (dual)str one compositestr chive encodingpr (optional) composite video YUVi) or video (YUVp, component (unpr thr HDMI Loop- = Recor = Optionalstr ough ocessed) ded leupload(ifsetup) eams oronecompositestr in internal storage. in internal attached storagedrive.To usebackground imagesincompositemode,thefilesmustreside image filesprovided byausercanbeuploadedtotheSMPorimported from anetwork If theunitisconnectedtoa LAN(see USB porttoconnectauser-provided USBdriveforstoringrecordings. portable, user-provided USBdrivesforstoringrecordings. TheoptionalRCP101alsohasa Two USBports(oneonthefront panel,one ontherear panel)provide aconnectionfor space. scroll downtothe the front panelofthedevice,use the partnumber( Storage Information the storageinformationtablefoundon thetotalstoragesize foramodelin solidstatestorage. View models have480GBinternal, uploaded toafileserver. solidstatestorage.Other Some modelshave150GBinternal, storageisavailableforstoringbackgroundInternal imagefilesandrecordings tobe Figure 3. eam forSMP351models oduces: eamed output Channel Channel Backgr B A PNG le storage) (inter nal ound rasterizing, SMP 300 SeriesBlockDiagram blending Deinter scaling, lacing, Configuration Drive inthe eam - SMP 300Series

Space SMP 300SeriesEmbeddedWeb PagesHelpFile power +12 V RCP 101 USB STORAGE Confidence encoding conversion Frame rate encoding Ar RECORD sub‑menutodeterminethetotaldrivespaceandremaining chive Contro signals > MARK System STATUS 1 Add aNetworkShare l re Recording Data cor Recor

Settings menu(see ding storage Inter les

/ ding nal 2 and /or

Settings). r CIFS serverlocation)towhichpublish Opencast system,oranFTP destination (suchas,Kalturasystem, For automaticuploading,setadefault ecor

LAN port Controls > USB drive Extern RCP r (fr SMP 300Series •Introduction ear port,or Status Menu dings (ScheduledEvents>Publish ont or Unit 101) onpage 90 al

Identification embeddedwebpage(see Contr pr panel eview AV Automatic onpage 46 ols r upload of

ecor network Network TCP/IP Outputs local output r HDMI/DVI drive ear panel ), background to a

ding con dence ) orbychecking Str output , SFTP eamed 2

). From Str ) and ar output , or eamed chive 7

Recordings Control Options • • The SMP 300Seriescreates recordings by: Make arecording • Recordings are initiatedinoneofseveralways: Start arecording and videoinputsources. The core functionoftheSMP 300Seriesistocreate recording filesfrom connectedaudio • • • • • • The SMP 300Seriescanbecontrolled usingthefollowing: • no metadata. Dual mode page 78 the selectedlayoutpreset (see input channelAand Bandtheoptionalbackground .pngfileasdefinedby Composite mode page 83 • • method, performoneofthefollowing: Unscheduled ( keyboard ormouseportontherear panel. The optionalExtron RCP101remote control panelconnectedthrough eitherthe accept aTTLinputsignalforlocaldevicecontrol. Alternatively, theycanbeconfigured asdigitaloutputstodriveLEDsordevicesthat to receive statusfrom otherdeviceslikepush-buttoncontrols andprojector lifts. Four digitalI/Oportscanbeconfigured (usingaFlexOSapplication)asdigitalinputs of thenetworksettingsfordevice. browserpermit theuseofaninternal client.Thisallowslimitedwebpageconfiguration USB mouseandkeyboard portsprovide direct connectionofakeyboard andmouseto connection. SMP 300SeriesembeddedwebpagesoverEthernet Config port. RS‑232 viatherear panelRemotecaptivescrew connector, orUSBviathefront panel viatheLANconnection, Simple InstructionSet(SIS)commandssentoverEthernet Front panelmenusandcontrols scheduling serversuchasOpencastorMicrosoft Exchange)(see a periodicbasis(updatedonfixedinterval),oranongoing basis(usingacompatible specified inacalendarschedule.Schedulescanbeimported onaone-timebasis, Scheduled recordings • Click the RCP 101 remote control panel. Press the touchpanel withacustomscript). Tap acontrol buttononaconfigured touchpanel(suchasanExtron TLP Pro Series the optionsin embedded webpages(see ). fordetailsonhowtosetuprecording schedules). —ScalingchannelAand Binfullscreen withnobackground and Record Record ad hoc —Scalingandarrangingthecontentfrom oneorbothAV ( ( Start ) recordings — Recordings startautomaticallyatthedateandtime )buttoninthe )buttononthefront paneloftheSMP 300Series or

an Layout presets (for compositemodeonly)

Start anAd HocRecording Ad

hoc —Require manualconfiguration.To usethis

Recording AV

Controls window SMP 300Series •Introduction paneloftheSMP 300Series onpage 59 System Settings ) andset on on 8

Features • • • • • • authorized toaccessthatfolderorusetoolssuchasOpencast. Uploading recordings toaserverallowstheuserarchive orshare fileswithotherswhoare automatically uploadedtoanetworkserverfolder. connected USBdrive.Recordings stored (notonaUSBdrive)canalso be internally Recording memoryandonanoptional filescanbesavedintheSMP 300Seriesinternal Output andshare recordings page (see of howarecording isinitiated.Defaultfilenamesare specifiedwithinthe The SMP 300Seriescreates asetofthesametypesfilesforeveryrecording, regardless • • • NOTES: and confidence]incompositemode,three encodingstreams [ChAarchive, ChBarchive Encoding thecontentintouptothree encodingstreams (twoencodingstreams [archive interpretation. including picture-in-picture andpicture-by-picture arrangementsforoptimal only) —Displayoneortwo high resolution sources invarious window arrangements, High qualityscalingwith flexibletwo-windowmanagement pullstreamingand multicastRTSP foreachencode. supports multipleconcurrent stream modesperchannelallowing simultaneousunicast Simultaneous unicastandmulticaststreaming perencode staff canalsoviewstreaming inlowresolution forsupportfunctions. presentations andextendlivestreaming tooverflowrooms ormediaservers.AV andIT Stream andrecord simultaneously and positionstwoAV source signalsinlayoutsthatmaximizetheviewingexperience. Process twohighresolution AV signalsfrom uptofiveavailableinputs are packagedforplaybackwithintheplayerenvironment. everything accessiblefrom asinglepoint.Opencast ensures recordings withmetadata previously recorded, orarchived mediafilescanbeaddedtoOpencast,making and playbackofmediafilesfrom meetings,lectures, andotherliveevents.Current, Opencast isaend-to-endsoftware solutionthatfacilitatesthecapture, management, & Layout defaultlocation),oronanoptionalUSBdrive(see within theunit(theinternal, metadata, thumbnailimages,andoptionalchaptermarkers.Thesefilesare stored either Creating asetoffiles and confidence. layout intothree encoderstreams thatincludearchive channelA,archive channelB, SMP 352modelsand351models,withLinkLicense,encodethecontent and confidence. SMP 351modelsencodethecontentandlayoutintotwoencodingstreams, archive and confidence]indualchannelmode(see • • server folder). publishing destinationduringsystemsetup(FTP, SFTP, NetShare orCIFS/Windows To uploadrecordings forotherschedulingorintegrationmethods,specifya scheduling setup. recordings are automaticallyuploadedtotheserverlocationdefinedduring When integratedwithanOpencastorKalturaserver, both

Setting theDefaultRecording Media forinstructionsonhowtosetthedefaultrecording storagelocation). —Oneormore .m4vor.mp4 filesandothercontaining — UsetheSMP 300Seriestodocument Encoding &Layout onpage 84 SMP 300Series •Introduction fordetails). ad hoc onpage 75 —TheSMP352 (Forcompositemode System andscheduled

Settings ). Encoding —Sizes

9

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • — Enabledualrecording from theembeddedwebpages,andSMP300Series Record andUSBstoragesimultaneously tointernal live streams. protocols andparametersare availableforquickandeasysetup andswitchingbetween Streaming presets resolutions commonlyusedforcomputervideoandHDTV. — Supportsawiderangeof inputresolutions, from standard definitionuptothe Supports source resolutions upto1920x1200,includingHDTV1080p/60 for streaming distributionandconfidenceviewingapplications. superior qualityimagesforoverflowapplicationsandlower resolutions are more efficient Stream atresolutions from 512x288to1080p/30 based oncontentorviewingrequirements. Use standard videoresolutions orcomputerresolutions and user-defined customrates Record at480p,720p,1080p,1024x768,1280x1024,orcustomresolution promote efficient searching andscanningfrom theExtron MediaPlayer(EMP). Chapters oreventscanbemarked,andJPEGimagethumbnails are produced that Chapter andeventmarkingwiththumbnailsviewable inExtron MediaPlayer simplified workflow. such aslevelcontrol, filtering,anddynamics thatincrease functionalityandprovide a DSP functionsenabledbyLinkLicense and bitrates,archive channelA,archive channelB,andconfidence. SMP 352modelsand351withLinkLicense SMP 351modelshavetwoencodingstreams applications. and resolutions are more efficient forstreaming distribution andconfidenceviewing high bitratesdeliversuperiorqualityimagesforoverflowapplicationsandlower Stream concurrently atthree resolutions andbitrates between contenttransfers Available solidstatestoragetoallowmore with400Gigabytesofinternal time streaming andrecording. licensing orsupportfees,theSMP 300Seriesisacosteffective solutionforAV License-free operationcontributestoa low costofownership both videochannelsindifferent PiPorSidebymodes. different layoutsforconfidencestream andlocalHDMIconfidenceoutputtopreview Flexible dualchannellayoutforconfidenceoutput system operation. applications ontotheSMP 300Seriesthatinterfacewithcontrol portsandautomate Flexible I/OportsforadvancedAV systemmanagement (Amazon Web Services),and more. services likeYouTube Live,Wowza Streaming Cloud,FacebookLive,Ustream, AWS pushstreamingSupports RTMP withstream nameorkey, anduserauthenticationfor RTMP streaming protocol supportspopularthird partyhostingservices as m4porm4v, theSMP352canalsorecord andstore audioasaseparatem4afile. Record audioasseparate m4afile player, computer, ormobiledevice. — Userecordings produced bytheSMP 300Seriesdirectly withanysoftware media Produces MP4mediafiles thatare compatiblewithvirtuallyanymediaplayer selected USBstoragedrive. can saveacopyoftherecording SSDdriveandanidenticalcopytothe totheinternal — Thirty-twostreaming presets combining stream destination, — Inadditiontostoringvideowithincludedaudio —IncludesadvancedaudioDSPfeatures, , archive andconfidence. SMP 300Series •Introduction —Highresolutions deliver —Choosebetweenten (Forcompositemodeonly) —Highresolutions and —InstallExtron FlexOS havethree resolutions — With no —With —

— —

10

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • SDI audiode-embedding channel. — Digitalandanalogaudiosignalsare supportedontheinputchannelsandoutput schedules from Microsoft ExchangeServer. Schedule streaming andrecording usingMicrosoft Exchange YouTube, Moodle,andRSSfeed. recordings tosystemssuch asiTunes-U, Blackboard LMS, SharePoint, CaptionSync, Compatible withthird partycontentmanagementsystems to KalturaManagementConsole. Directly compatiblewithKaltura recorded mediadirectly totheOpencastopen source contentmanagementsystem. Directly compatiblewithOpencastServer requiring mixingandDSPequipment. theuseofexternal Audio mixingandDSPfunctionality in theaudiomixalongwitheitherHDMIoranalogsources. compatibility withcommonAV signalformatsatresolutions upto1920x1200including HDMI, component,composite,andoptional3G‑SDIinput HDMI-embedded stereo audiooranalog stereo inputandoutputsignalsupport embedded stereo audio.Mixedanalogstereo audioisalsoavailable. is onlyavailableincompositemode,thatrecorded orstreamed withmixed,HDMI- HDMI outputwithaudio destinations. but cannotbestreamed orrecorded. Agreen signalispresented atnon-compliant can beviewedoncompliantdisplaysconnectedtotheSMP 300Seriesloopthrough, HDCP-compliant inputandoutputsignalmanagement Windows environments Supports thelatestSMBv2andSMBv3protocols forsecure filesharingin immediate playbackofrecordings. on SMP351cannowbemountedasnetworkshares onSMD-seriesdecodersfor Recording folderplaybackfrom SMD-seriesdecoders application requirements. to saverecordings tospecificstoragedirectories basedontheuserenvironment or Define specificstoragedestinationsforrecorded data convenient tousers. network storagedirectory Save recordings USBstorage,oradefined solidstatedrive,external tointernal 10 Mbps. storageusingarchiveof materialcanbesavedtointernal qualitymediaencodedat before destinations. Forthe480GBversion,uptoeightyhours transferringittoexternal SolidStateStorage Internal system incompositemode. layouts are availabletobe recalled quicklyfrom thefront control paneloranexternal Window layoutpresets simplifycontrol documented andrepurposed. — Ensures thatpresentations are streamed andrecorded, andvaluableinformationis Easy toconfigure andoperatefrom thefront control panelorexternal system 3G‑SDI inputconnection. 1080p/60. TheSMP 3513G‑SDIandSMP3523G-SDImodelsoffers anadditional —Presents apreview oftheblendedsource layout,which — Audiofrom anSDIsource canbedecodedandincluded —Recordings canbesaved topre-defined locationsmost —Saverecorded datatoreliable, storage, internal —Integratepublishingofrecorded mediadirectly —Produces aqualityaudioexperiencewithout —Sixteenstandard andcustomizedsource —Integrateschedulingandpublishingof SMP 300Series •Introduction —Recording folders —Configure theSMP 351 — Encryptedsignals —Provides —Manuallyupload —Easilyimport 11

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • schedules ontheSMP 300SeriesbyimportingiCalendarfilesmanuallyorautomatically. Schedule streaming andrecording usingiCalendar background image. can bepresented andclearlyidentifiedonrecording layoutswithAV sources anda Metadata textoverlay and Date. recordings Presenter, simpleincluding: Title, Subject,Description,Publisher, Contributor, Recording metadata between computerandvideosources are notexperienced. such asvisualjumps,glitches,anddistortioncommonly experiencedwhenswitching Clean switching on theviewingapplication,storage,streaming ornetworkconditions. 200 Kbps to10Mbpsforvideoandaudiobitratesfrom 80Kbpsto320based Adjustable recording andstreaming bitrates multicast pushstreaming applications. — SAPandSDPprotocols simplifyidentificationofAV source streams inunicast or Session AnnouncementProtocol (SAP)andSessionDescriptionProtocol (SDP) basedonnetworkconditions. transported usingUDPorRTP Streams (TS)maybeappliedinunicastormulticaststreaming applications.TSmaybe Push streaming transportprotocols to aidinfirewall navigation. streaming transportprotocols maybeapplied,basedonvariousnetworkconditionsor Pull streaming transportprotocols variety ofH.264devicesandstreaming applications. pull streaming sessionmanagementmakesthe SMP 300Seriescompatiblewitha Push andpullstreaming sessionmanagement support different applications. management configurations.Userscanquicklyswitchbetweenthesepresets to as H.264profile, resolution, GOP(group ofpictures) length,andbitratesession 32 standard orcustomizablepresets forsavingspecificencodingsettingssuch Encoding presets forquickrecall ofspecificcompression settings controlan external system. and metadata,simplifyingmanagementselectionoflayoutsfrom thefront panelor standard orcustomizablepresets thatspecifythesizeandpositioningofAV sources Recording layoutpresets simplifycontrol image quality. Thiscansavetimeandeffort infinetuningdisplayedimages. video signalandthenautomaticallyadjustssizing,centering,filteringtooptimize Auto‑Image setup for additionalAV equipmentsuchasdistributionamplifiers. buffered loop-through, foreasyintegrationintoneworlegacysystemswithouttheneed Channel Abuffered inputloop-through devices. ability tooptimizevideocodingforusewithvarioustypesofapplicationsanddecoding supports useoftheBaseline,Main,orHighProfiles atLevels4.x,or3.xproviding the Standards-based H.264/MPEG‑4AVC videocompression devicesusedintheAVsensors, orexternal presentation environment. anddigitalI/OcontrolRS‑232, Ethernet, ports for recording orstreaming applications. digital I/Oportstocontrol andmanagedevicesusedintheAV presentation environment Uploadable Extron FlexOSapplications —Switchinghasacleantransitionbetweensources. Distractions —Whenactivated,theunitautomaticallyanalyzesincoming —Metadatacanbeassigned tomakeindexingandsearching of (Composite mode only) — Data concerning therecording (Compositemodeonly)— Data concerning —RTP, interleaved,andHTTPtunneled RTSP — Native RTP andMPEG‑2Transport —NativeRTP —ChannelAinputconnectorsincludea —Uploadapplicationsthatusethefour (Compositemodeonly)—Provides 16 —Selectvideobitratesfrom —Interfacewithcontrol systems, —Theflexibilitytoapplypushand SMP 300Series •Introduction —Configure recording —TheSMP 300Series —Provides 12

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • files atresolutions upto1920x1080identifyorganizationaloreventinformation. Uploadable background imagefiles Extron EverlastPowerSupplyiscovered bya7‑ year partsandlaborwarranty cost. with high‑demonstratedreliability andlowpowerconsumptionforreduced operating ExtronInternal Everlastpowersupply Rack-mountable 1U Includes LockIt the HDMIoutputconnection,orattachanoptionalRCP 101forrecording control. SMP 300 Seriesusingakeyboard andmouseviewingtheembeddedwebpagefrom USB keyboard andmouseports adjustments. video windowforviewingthelivestream, aswellsource inputandencoding Embedded webinterface configuration andreal-time managementfrom acontrol system. monitoringandcontrolEthernet USB,andRS‑232control.Ethernet, functions only, orallbutrecording transport controls. Allfunctionsare availablethrough Front panellockout devices EDID Minderautomaticallymanagescommunicationbetweenconnected detected again,theseimagesettingsare automaticallyrecalled from memory. position, andpicture settingsbasedontheincoming signal.Whenthesamesignalis Auto InputMemory using e-mailviaSimpleMailTransfer Protocol. Alarm reporting exist. is low, encryptedsignalsare detected,AV signalerrors occur, orothererror conditions System workflowalarms they are manuallydeleted. first-in, first-outbasis.Importantrecordings canbelockedandretained indefinitelyuntil created fornewrecordings whenadditionalspaceisrequired. Filesare deletedona storage Automatic filemanagementforinternal User configurablerecording filesize as asinglefile. than 4GBcanbebundledintoarecording packageofsequentialMP4files,orsaved Extended timerecording oftheoutputsignal. top leftcorner time reference (HH:MM:SSFormat)canbepresented withintheonscreen displayinthe On-screen displayvideo timereference and statusonsource imagestoaidintroubleshooting andfaultfindingactivities. On-screen displayinformation Background imagecanbe appliedincompositemodeonly. , ensuringuseofoptimalsignalformats. HDMIcablelacingbrackets. —Automatecommunicationwithmonitoringsystemsorsupportstaff —Whenactivated,theSMP300Seriesautomaticallystores size, —Thisfeature locksouteitherallfront panelfunctions,Menu , fullrackwidthmetalenclosure. —Recordings thatwould produce amediafilesizegreater —Provides anintuitivewebinterfacewithembedded — Notifymonitoringsystemsorsupportstaff ifdiskspace (Compositemodeonly)—Present deviceinformation —Configure communicationsettingsofthe —Controllable supporting overEthernet, (Composite modeonly)—UploadPNGimage —Splitrecordings intospecifiedfilessizes. — Provides worldwidepowercompatibility, (Compositemodeonly)—Text displayinga SMP 300Series •Introduction — Storagespaceisautomatically 13 Installation

This section provides information on: • Mounting the SMP 300 Series • Rear Panel Overview • Rear Panel Reset

Mounting the SMP 300 Series The SMP 300 Series models are housed in a 1U high, full rack width metal enclosure that can sit on a table with the provided rubber feet or mounted using the attached rack mounts. Select a suitable mounting location (see Mounting the SMP 300 Series on page 128), then choose an appropriate mounting option. • Before connecting the SMP 300 Series, turn off all devices that are to be connected. • Connect all external devices to the SMP models before applying power.

Rear Panel Overview figure 4 G H

100-240V 0.8A MAX AUDIO 3 5 OUTPUTS SMP 351 HDMI HDMI B-Y MOUSE / LOOPOUT KEYBOARD 1 3G/HD/SDI LAN 1 LR DIGITAL I/O REMOTE 4 USB STORAGE RS-232 2 LR LRAUDIO LRAUDIO RESET INPUTS-CH A INPUTS-CH B 2 R-YVID 1 234G Tx Rx G /Y HDMI HDMI 50-60 Hz A B C D E F L M J I K N O P Q Figure 4. SMP 300 Series Rear Panel (SMP 351 3G-SDI shown) A 100-240 VAC IEC connector for power input J (Optional input 5) 3G/HD/SDI input card (SMP 351 3G-SDI and SMP 352 3G-SDI only) B USB type A port for external storage device K 3.5 mm, 5-pole captive screw port for channel B analog stereo audio input C (2) USB type A ports for mouse and keyboard, or L HDMI loop thru from input 1 or 2 remote control RCP 101 D 3.5 mm, 5-pole captive screw port for digital I/O M 3.5 mm, 5-pole captive screw port for channel A analog stereo audio loop output E 3.5 mm, 3-pole captive screw port for Simple N HDMI preview output Instruction Set (SIS™) control over RS‑232 F HDMI inputs 1 and 2 O 3.5 mm, 5-pole captive screw port for analog stereo audio output G 3.5 mm, 5-pole captive screw port for channel A P Reset button and LED analog stereo audio input H 3 BNC connectors for component or composite Q RJ-45 Ethernet port for LAN connection video input 3 I HDMI input 4

SMP 300 Series • Introduction 14

Control SystemandExternalDeviceConnections Power Connection Q P E D C B control, andfirmware upgrades. be connectedforstreaming output,Extron recommends usingitforconfiguration,remote can beusedforcontrol andconfigurationfrom theLANport.Becauseportmust figure 8 figure 4 The SMP 300Seriescanbeconfigured andcontrolled from theRemoteRS-232port(see A

network. Thedefaultnetworksettingsare: connector(LAN) RJ-45 Ethernet during thereset operation(see The LEDindicatestheselectedreset mode,andprovides thereset status settings ortoreturn allsettingsbacktofactorydefaults. There are severalreset modestoreturn theSMPtouser Reset buttonandLED The defaultprotocol portis: to control theSMP 300SeriesusingSIScommandsoverRS‑232. a 3-polecaptive Remote RS-232 Configurator user-defined digitalinputsoroutputs(see Digital I/O browserand theinternal view. < akeyboard andmouseconnected,theusercantoggle two USBtype Aports.With USB keyboard andmouse,orRCP101 hard driveorUSBflash formattedwithacompatiblefilesystem. rear USBportstosaverecorded files.Thestoragedevicecanbeanystandard external USB storagedevice Features provided IECcord. Verify thefront panelbuttonsandLCDilluminate(see 100-240 VAC powerinput DHCP: Gateway: Default Subnet Mask: IP Address: • • NOTE: NOTE: CtrL 1 stopbit 9600 baud , , crossover cable(see Ethernet 4 GB ortherecording creates multiple4GBfiles. formatted storagevolumes.ForFAT32 USBstorage,filesizesmustbelimitedto FAT32, VFAT longfilenameextensions, EXT2,EXT3,EXT4filesystems,orNTFS- B E + on ontheprevious page)orthefront panelUSBmini-BConfigport(see

ALT onpage 20 The SMP 300Seriescandetectandrecord toUSBstoragedevicesusing To connecttheSMP 300 Seriesdirectly port,usea toacomputerEthernet —Connecttothefour3.5mm,5-polecaptivescrew portstoprovide page 20 + onpage 98 S screw connectorforbidirectional (±5 V)serialhostcontrol, > theHDMIoutput(see —ConnectthehostRS-232cabletorear panelwith OFF 0.0.0.0 255.255.0.0 192.168.254.254 ) usingSIScommandswithDataViewer. Astandard webbrowser ). — Attach an optional external USBstoragedevicetothefront —Attachanoptionalexternal or • • —Press thebuttontoreset theSMP 300Series. ). no flowcontrol (handshaking) no parity (see Rear PanelReset figure 4 Connection Options — Useastandard cabletoconnecta Ethernet figure 8 ontheprevious page)—Connectthe About theFlexOSApp-DigitalI/O —Connectakeyboard andmousetothe • ) betweenthestandard preview output onpage 18 8 databits SMP 300Series •Introduction ‑defined configuration onpage 99 ).

). Front Panel

REMOTE Tx Receive RS-232 Rx Transmit G 15 Ground figure 5 figure 6

Output Connections Input Connections M L K J I H G F • • page 14 The audioandvideoinputsare grouped intochannelAandB(see ChannelBanalogand3G-SDIaudioinput HDMIinput4 Analog videoinput3 Sleeve(s) Audio isalwaysfrom audioinput( to this5-pole,3.5mmcaptivescrew theconnectorasshownin port.Wire device totheHDMILoopThruoutputviewselected input1or2. HDMI loop-thruoutput the audiocanbesettoOff. theconnectorasshownin Wire audio canbeselectedfrom eithertheHDMI embedded audio,Ch Banalogor stereo linelevelaudiodevicetothis5-pole,3.5 mmcaptivescrew port.Channel B Connect a3G/HD/SDIvideosignaltothisBNCconnector. Serial digitalvideoinput5(SMP3513G-SDIandSMP352only) input 4. R-Y, VID/Y).ConnectacompositevideosignaltotheVID/YBNCconnector. Slee connector asshownin the selected foroutputwithHDMIinputs1and2insteadoftheembeddedaudio.Wire level audiodevicetothis5-pole,3.5mmcaptivescrew port.ChannelAaudiocanbe to input1and2. HDMI input (1 and 2) Channel Banalogaudiocanbeselectedforvideoinputs3( Channel Aanalogaudioinputcanbeselectedforvideoinputs1or2( Audio loopoutput Channel Aanalogaudioinput Figure 6. Figure 5. ATTENTION: NOTE: Ring Ring Ring Ring v Tip Tip e(s) Tip Tip ). • • select "FullRange"forthemostaccuratevideoreproduction. When usingavideosource withadjustablequantizationrangeontheseinputs, connecter lesmanchonsauxcontactsnégatifs(–). Pour l’audioasymétriqueconnectezlesmanchonsau contact ausol.NePAS connect thesleevestonegative(–)contacts. For unbalancedaudio,connectthesleevestoground contact.DONOT

Balanced AudioOutput Balanced StereoInput Channel A(inputs1and2)isoptimizedforfullrangesources suchasPCs. (high impedance) —ConnectanHDMI(orDVIwithsuitableadapter)source deviceto Audio OutputCaptiveScrew Connector Wiring Audio InputCaptiveScrew ConnectorWiring

—Connectabalancedorunbalancedstereo linelevelaudiodevice —Connectcomponentvideotothethree BNCconnectors(B-Y, — Connect an HDMI (or DVI with suitable adapter) source device figure 5 —ConnectanHDMI(orDVIwithsuitableadapter)display Right Left Right Left . —Connectabalancedorunbalancedstereo line G Sleeve(s) ). Slee Slee NO GroundHere NO GroundHere Tip Tip Tip Tip ve ve Unbalanced StereoInput Unbalanced AudioOutput —Connectabalancedorunbalanced (high impedance) SMP 300Series •Introduction H figure 5 ), 4( Right Left Right Left I . ), or5( F figure 4 Do nottinthewires! ). Do nottinthewires! figure 6 J — on ). . 16

O N

mono. is selectedfrom channelBdualmonooramix ofbothchannelAandBdual the SMP352and351withLinkLicense,dualmonoenabled,audiooutput is selectedfrom channelA,B,oramix ofbothchannelAandB.For analog audioisselectedforthatinput(see The audiooutputdependsbothontheinputselectionandifembeddedor wiring information)forselectaudiooutput. device tothis5-pole3.5mmcaptivescrew port(see recorded browser contentandaninternal client. keyboard andmouse,thepreview outputcanbeswitchedbetweena preview ofthe device tothisHDMIoutput(see HDMI preview output Analog audiooutput ATTENTION: NOTE: enabled, thedefaultoutputischannelAandBdualmono. • • • • les terminaisonsdesàviscaptivesetpourraientsortir. Ne pasétamerlescâbles.Lescâblesétamésnesontaussibienfixésdans terminals andcouldpullout. wiresDo nottinthewires. are Tinned notassecure inthecaptivescrew captives. S’ils sonttrop courts,ilspourraientsortir, mêmes’ilssontattachésparlesvis longs, lescâblesexposéspourraientsetoucheretprovoquer uncourtcircuit. les dénuder. Lalongueuridéaleestde5 mm(3/16 inches).S’ilssonttrop La longueurdescâblesexposésestimportantelorsquel’onentreprend de tightly fastenedbythecaptivescrews. short circuit betweenthem.Ifshorter, thewires canbeeasilypulledoutevenif length is3/16inch(5mm).Iflonger, theexposedwires maytouch,causinga The lengthoftheexposedwires inthestrippingprocess isimportant.Theideal

The defaultaudiochannelisAandB.Whendualmode —Connectabalancedorunbalancedstereo linelevelaudio —ConnectanHDMI(orDVIwithsuitableadapter)display figure 4 onpage 14 Audio Select SMP 300Series •Introduction ). UsinganattachedUSB figure 6 onpage 41 ontheprevious pagefor ). Audiooutput 17 figure 7

Rear PanelReset Figure 7. of thereset modes. See power totheSMP 300Series. when theSMP 300Seriesispowered onorpress andholdthe reset modes,useapointed stylusorsmallscrewdriver topress andholdthe (numbered 1,4,and5)thatare initiatedfrom therear panelreset button.To selectdifferent returns theSMP 300Seriestovariousmodesofoperation.There are three unitreset modes The ATTENTION: NOTES: Mode 5 Mode 4 Mode 1 for 9seconds. Press andhold the Resetbutton. Press andhold for 6seconds. Press andhold • • • • • • • Reset figure 7 l’appareil aumodedeconfigurationpardéfaut. réinitialisation supprimentl’intégralitéducontenuchargédel’utilisateuretremettent Analysez minutieusementlesdifférents modesderéinitialisation. Certainsmodesde and revert thedevicetodefaultconfiguration. Review thereset modescarefully. Somereset modesdeletealluser loadedcontent on page 108 For informationonresetting theSMP 300Series usingSIScommandssee System Resets The SMP 300Seriescanalsobereset usingtheweb-baseduserinterface(see Reset modes2and3are notavailablefortheSMP 300Series. Each reset modeisaseparate reset (notacontinuationfrom mode1to5). content. comparing thereset modesanddetailingaffected configurationsettingsanduser page closeallopenIPandTelnet connectionsandallsockets.Thetablehasdetails The reset modeslistedinthe buttonontherear paneloftheSMP 300Series(see andthe Resetting theSMP 300Series

RESET RESET RESET . SMP 300SeriesResetModes onpage 96 times. Reset LEDflashesthree Reset LEDflashestwice. to theSMP300Series. ). SMP 300SeriesResetModes Apply power RESET RESET

table onthenextpageforasummary SMP 300Series •Introduction Reset LEDflashes,thengoesoff. press andreleaseagain. Release, then Reset LEDflashes,thengoesoff. press andreleaseagain. Release, then RESET RESET RESET Reset figure 4 Release Resetbutton. immediately immediately tableonthenext buttonwhileapplying onpage 14 Reset Resets button ) 18

Reset to Factory Defaults Reset All IP Settings Factory Firmware Mode *5 *4 1 again within1second and press the at 6seconds).Then,release (once at3seconds,again the Hold inthe applying powertotheunit. panel Hold intherecessed rear Activation again within1second and press the at 9seconds).Then,release again at6seconds, times (onceat3seconds, the Hold inthe NOTE: NOTE: Reset Reset most current firmware tothedevice. second. Reset

LEDblinkstwice LEDblinksthree Do notoperatewiththedefaultfirmware loadedbyamode 1reset. Useitonlytoloadthe *For modes4and5,nothinghappensifthemomentary press doesnotoccurwithin1 Reset Reset buttonwhile Reset Reset buttonuntil buttonuntil button button * * . . SMP 300SeriesResetModes • • • • • • defaults (exceptthefirmware). Performs acompletereset tofactory • • • • • • power cycle. factory defaultfirmware forasingle The SMP 300Seriesreverts tothe Result Sets thesubnetmaskaddress ( back tofactorydefault Sets theIPaddress default. Sets portmappingbacktofactory succession. of theunitflashesfourtimesin The Clears allfilesfrom theunit. Clears allusersettings. Resets allIPoptions. Clears portconfigurations. Does everythingmode4does. succession. of theunitflashesfourtimesin The Turns DHCPoff. the factorydefault( Sets thegatewayIPaddress to ( back tothefactorydefault 192.168.254.254 255.255.0.0 Reset Reset LEDontherear panel LEDontherear panel ). 0.0.0.0 ). ). SMP 300Series •Introduction display. appears onaconnected Resetting ARP andtheMACaddress. IP address informationusing Mode 4isusedtoset maintained. All userfilesandsettingsare with user-loaded firmware. incompatibility issuesarise for asinglepowercycleif the factorydefaultfirmware Use mode1torevert to Purpose andNotes Resetting events. uploading, andalsotoreplace with defaultconfigurationand Mode 5isusefultostartover page 108 command command Mode 5isequivalenttoSIS display. appears onaconnected ). Absolute reset ZQQQ

IP SMP

Settings

(seeSIS 300

Series

on

19 Front Panel Operation

This section of the manual discusses the operation of the SMP 300 Series from the front panel. Topics covered include: • Front Panel Features • Layout Presets (For Composite Mode Only) • Power Up Procedure • Front Panel Menu Operation • Front Panel Lockout (Executive Modes) • Alarms

Front Panel Features figure 8 CHANNEL A Extron AUDIO ADJUST SMP 351 LR LAYOUT MENU Streaming Media Processor 2 PRESET I/O 1 1 CHANNEL B 2 USB STORAGE CONFIG MARK SWAP NEXT 3 3 4 5 4

A B C D E F G H I J Figure 8. SMP 300 Series Front Panel A Type A USB connector and activity LED for F Layout Preset and Swap buttons external storage B USB mini B connector for configuration G Menu display C Input buttons for source selection H Menu navigation buttons (MENU and NEXT) D Record controls with LED indicators I Adjust knobs (left [ and right {) E Audio level indicators J I/O display LEDs A USB storage port and activity LED — Connect a USB compatible media device to this port. The green LED blinks during both reading and writing of data. The storage device can be any standard external hard drive or USB flash drive formatted with a compatible file system. NOTE: The SMP 300 Series can detect and record to USB storage devices using FAT32, VFAT long file name extensions, EXT2, EXT3, EXT4 file systems, or NTFS‑formatted storage volumes. For FAT32 USB storage, file sizes must be limited to 4 GB or the recording creates multiple 4 GB files.

ATTENTION: • Disconnecting a USB device while recording to it may result in corrupt or lost data. • Déconnecter un périphérique USB alors qu’un enregistrement y est effectué, peut engendrer une altération ou une perte de données.

SMP 300 Series • Front Panel Operations 20

B F E D C

port withaUSBmini-Bcable(notsupplied).UsethistosendSIScommandsthe Config port figure 8 Only) select oneofthe16capture presets (see Layout Preset • • LEDs indicatebothsignalpresence andactiveinputsignallevels. left andrightaudiochannelsfrom -60dBFS(oneLED)to0(eightLEDs).The Audio levelindicators • • • • record operation. buttons toperformtheoperation.Thelightindicatecurrent stateof Record controls withLEDindicators button lightsolidamber. The currently selectedChannelAinputbuttonandcurrently selectedChannelBinput • • input ports. Input selection and Control SMP 300 Seriesfordeviceconfigurationandcontrol (see button illuminates green for1second toindicatetheinput swap. Press to activateit. NOTE: blended ormerged(ifapplicable). measured afterallaudioinputadjustmentsare applied andaudiosources are Normal Mode gain (see currently selectedinputleftandrightchannelaudiolevelstoassistsetting Input ConfigurationMode automatically created atafixedinterval(default: 1minute). marker isinserted.ThebuttonalsoilluminateswhenJPEGthumbnailsare during recording, thebuttonilluminatesgreen momentarilytoindicateachapter Mark resume recording, orpress green toindicaterecording ispaused.Press Pause solid green whenthefileisfinalized. the stopbuttonblinksgreen whiletherecorded fileisbeingfinalized,thenlights Stop red duringactiverecording. Record input 4,ChannelBanalogaudioisoutputwiththeselectedvideoinput. input 3, HDMIinput4,and(optional)SDI5.Ifanalogaudioisselectedfor Channel B analog audioisoutputwiththevideo. analog audio(insteadofembeddedaudio)isselectedforaninput,ChannelA Channel A is selected. onthenextpage.Thebutton illuminatesgreen. Usethe SWAP ,

—Press I —Press Input 5lightsonlywhentheoptionalSDIinputcard isinstalledandtheinput —Press toswitchChannelAandB inputsbetweenthetwolayoutwindows.The

— Press startingonpage 99 (see on theprevious page) toselectthedesired outputlayout.Press Audio Level —Press thecorresponding buttontoselectHDMIinput1or2.If —Press thecorresponding buttontoselectcomposite/component (for compositemodeonly) — Press thesebuttonsto select inputsassociatedwiththerear panel figure 8 —Themetersdisplaytheleftandrightencoderinput levels MARK tostoptheactiverecording. Whenpressed duringarecording, —Two stacksofeightgreen LEDstracktheaudiolevelof toplaceachaptermarkerintherecorded file.Whenpressed topauserecording. Whenpressed, the ontheprevious page)—Connectacontrol devicetothis torecord theselectedinputs.Therecord buttonlightssolid onpage 41 Stop —Wheninputgainisadjusted,themetersdisplay ). tohalttherecording. ). —Press the SMP 300Series •Front PanelOperations Layout Presets (For CompositeMode and Swap Record —Press Record orpress Remote Communication , ADJUST Stop LAYOUT Pause Pause , Pause knobs(see

PRESET buttonblinks againto , and NEXT to Mark ( H 21

) figure 9 Extro

USB STORAGE A n CHANNEL CHANNEL B CONFIG

B A 3 1 Layout Presets (ForCompositeModeOnly) C 4 2 5 D MARK AUDIO LR E 3. 2. G 1. To select1ofthe12preconfigured layoutpresets: The twoinputchannels,AandB,are determinedbydirect selectionfrom thefront panel. Figure 9. screen. There are 12preconfigured and4userpresets forcustomlayoutconfigurations. Layout presets definewhichinputsare selectedandwhere theyare placed ontheoutput J I H SW SW LA PRESET F YOUT AP AP

name appearsontheoutputdisplay, stop. Use either ( Press page 14 and Menu display Select input1or2forchannelAand3,4,5 channelB(see digital output( on oroff statusofthecorresponding portswhichcanbeconfigured asdigitalinputor connections ontherear panel( I/O display and tomakeadjustmentswithinamenuorsubmenu. Adjust knobs • • submenus. enabled). Press toaccessandnavigatetheconfigurationcontrol menusand Menu navigation( listed instead. Procedure the menu.Duringnormaloperation,adefaultdisplaycycleispresented (see G NOTE: NOTE: ). NEXT MENU (Executive Modes) configuration usingthefront panelisnotpossible(see NEXT LAYOUT ).

Front PanelLayoutPreset andSwap buttons(see — Usethisbuttontostepthrough thesubmenusofselectedmenu. — Usethisbuttontoenterandmovethrough themainmenusystem. The buttonsandcontrols ontheSMP 300Seriescanbelockedsothat The menubuttonblinksred whenthere isanactivealarm(see ADJUST onpage 24 —Astackoffourgreen LEDsthatcorrespond tothefourdigitalI/O G

see PRESET

—Displaysconfigurationmenusandstatusinformation.Usethe (left knob( About theFlexOSApp-DigitalI/OConfigurator

MENU [ (see

figure 8 and right ). Ifthere isanactivealarm(see onpage 47 I and figure 9 ) tocyclethrough thepresets. Whenthedesired layout MENU NEXT NEXT H see onpage 20 NEXT { , ) figure 4 F — Rotatethesecontrols toscroll through menus ). ) ADJUST ) toopenthemenuonfront paneldisplay —Lightsamber(unlessmenulockoutis I SMP 300Series •Front PanelOperations onpage , H ) and

J I/O 4 3 2 1 14 ADJUST ) Alarms . EachLEDindicatesthe Str eaming MediaPr Front PanelLockout knobs( SMP 351 onpage 47 ocessor I onpage figure 4 ) tonavigate Alarms ), itis Power Up on MENU 98 ). ).

22 figure 10

5. 4. 3. 2. 1. To store acustomlayoutconfiguration: 5. 4. Figure 10. MET MET MET MET Ch. B Ch. B NOTE: 16:9 16:9 ADA ADA ADA ADA PbP 25%,mainwindow75% PbP 25%,mainwindow75% PbP 25%,mainwindow75% TA TA TA TA PBP UpperRight<2> Press Use either Press andhold as needed(see Change thewindowsizeandcenteringadjustmentsforeachinputtomodifylayout Select thelayoutfrom theaboveconfigurations closesttoyourrequirements. If desired, press Press

PBP UpperLeft<1> PBP MidLeft<3> NOTE: Ch. A 16:9 custom layoutsattheresolution atwhichthey are toberecalled. have slightlydifferent spacingatlowerresolutions. Itisrecommended tosave

NEXT NEXT PIP PBP Ch. A Ch. A 16:9 16:9

Layout Presets =Picture InPicture =Picture BesidePicture In order topreserve theaspectratiosofwindows,somelayoutscan ADJUST tosavethenewlayout. (see MET MET Ch. B 16:9 ADA ADA TA TA LAYOUT Picture Control Menu SWAP figure 9 knobtoselectthedesired preset locationtostore thenewlayout. Ch. B 16:9 toreverse thescreen positionoftheAandBinputselections. PiP 25%,mainwindow100% PiP 25%,mainwindow100% PbP 25%,mainwindow75%

PIP UpperRight<6> PRESET PIP UpperLeft<5> PBP MidRight<4> , Ch. A 16:9 H Ch. A Ch. A 16:9 16:9

on theprevious page)toselectthelayout. for3secondstoenterthesavedlayoutmenu.

MET MET Ch. B Ch. B 16:9 16:9 ADA ADA TA TA onpage 29 SMP 300Series •Front PanelOperations Windows horizontallycenter Windows horizontallycenter Ch. A Ch. A 16:9 16:9 Side by(1)<8> Fullscr Side by<7> main window100% MORE MET MORE MET MET MET Ch. A ), 16:9 een A<9> ADA ADA ADA ADA T T A, A, TA TA Ch. B Ch. B 16:9 16:9 ed ed main window75%,centere main window75%,centere META META CH BCenter<12> CH ACenter<11> Fullscr main window100% DATA, MOREMET DATA, MOREMET Ch. B Ch. B Ch. A een B<10> 16:9 16:9 16:9 ADA ADA d inscr d inscr TA TA een een 23 figure 11 figure 12

Power UpProcedure Po On wer ELECTR Power FIRMW On LO E XTR ADING ONICS ON ARE ELECTRONICS FIRMWARE LOADING EXTRON sec. ~4 sec. 2 sec. 30 SMP 35xFW added tothedefaultcycle. resolution. Duringrecording, thecurrent lengthoftherecording andtimeremaining are selection. Itshowstheselectedinputsandtheirresolutions, stream bit rate, andoutput The defaultdisplaycyclevariesdependingontheinputvideosignalandoutputstream Figure 12. Figure 11. configured orhasanactivealarm),thedefaultdisplaycycleisonLCDdisplay. and page 15 Connect thepowercord toa100240VAC supply(see NOTE: NOTE: INITIALIZING sec. ~4 SMP 352 E sec. 2 sec. 30 recording timeavailableduringanunscheduledrecording. recording. the activeinputandtypeofvideosignal. connected properly. Devicesdonotneedtobepowered. XTR figure 12 ON SMP 35xFWV1.06 ). Theunitundergoesselftestingduringthebootsequence(see

V1.06 INITIALIZING The informationshowninthedefaultdisplaycyclediffers dependingon Before poweringtheSMP 300 Series,ensure thatallnecessarydevicesare SMP 35x EXTRON below).Afterthesequenceiscomplete(andwhendevicenotbeing Boot Se Boot SequenceandDefaultDisplayCycleforCompositeMode Time sec. 45

Remain sec. 45 quence andDefaultDisplayCycleforDualChannelMode displaystheremaining timeintheeventand theestimated In 11024x768@60 In 3720p@60 SMP 300Series •Front PanelOperations TIME REMAIN HH:MM:SS 2 sec. Time In 11024x768@60 In 3720p@60

Record TIME REMAIN Default Displa HH:MM:SS 2 sec. Power Connection Default DisplayCycle sec. 2 sec. 2 onlydisplaysduringa 1280x720@30 fps TIME RECORD CHA 5.0MB HH:MM:SS sec. 2 sec. 2 y Cyc 2 sec. ARCHIVE 5.0MB 1280x720@30 fps TIME RECORD figure 11 HH:MM:SS le 2 sec. 2 sec. 2 sec. on 1280x720@30 fps CHB 5.0MB

24 Power On ELECTRONICS FIRMWARE LOADING EXTRON NOTE: r

Time Recor depending ontheactiveinputandtypeofvideosignal. Time Remaindisplaysther estimated r ecor figure 13

ding. The informationshowninthedefaultdisplaycycledif sec. ~4 sec. 2 sec. 30 ecor d displaysonlyduringar SMP 351FWV1.00

ding timeavailableduringanunscheduled INITIALIZING SMP 351 EXTRON

emaining timeintheeventand Front PanelMenuOperation sec. 45 ecor ding. Menu Overview Menu Navigation fers

Figure 13. TIME If there isanactiverecording, the numberandvideoformatofactiveinputcurrent outputresolution. The screen progressively cyclesthrough theinputandoutputformatinformation,showing (see After start-up,whennoadjustmentsare activelybeingmade,the I H G menus are usedprimarilyduringtheinitialsetup. LCD screen (seeimageat the right, panel controls andthemenusdisplayedon and Control SIS commands(see the Web-Based UserInterface using theembeddedwebpages(see Configuration andadjustmentscanbeperformed NOTE: ADJUST Extro flowcharts inthischapterfordetails). control toscroll through submenuoptionsandtomakeconfigurationselections(seethe • • Navigation buttons Menu display in placeoftheinputtype.Forexample, figure 13

REMAIN USB STORAGE A n menu. NEXT MENU

If asignalisnotpresent onthecurrently selectedinput, CHANNEL CHANNEL In#1 1024x768@60 In#3 720p@60 B startingonpage 99 CONFIG showsthetimeremaining foranactivescheduled recording. belowand

Default DisplayCycleforCompositeMode knobs TIME REMAIN button HH:MM:SS 2 sec. button B A Default DisplayCycle 3 1 —Displaystheconfigurationmenusona16x2LCDdisplay. Remote Communication

( C [

4 2 — Press tomovebetweenthesubmenusofselectedmain

— Press toactivatemenus andcyclethrough themainmenus. , — figure 14 { 5 ) sec. 2 sec. 2 — Inconfigurationmode,rotate theleft( TIME ARCHIVE 5.0MB 1280x720@30 fps ), orthefront onpage 49 TIME RECORD D onthenextpage)runsMenudisplayLCD(

HH:MM:SS RECORD MARK G Overview of ). These 2 sec. AUDIO LR E displaysthecurrent lengthoftherecording. IN#4 SW SW LA PRESET SMP 300Series •Front PanelOperations F ), YOUT AP AP

NOT

DETECTED G . Default NOT [

DETECTED ) control andright( MENU NEXT NEXT

H Display appears ADJUST

I Cycle G ). 25 {

) J I/O 4 3 2 1

Str eaming MediaPr SMP 351 ocessor Po On wer ELECTR figure 15 FIRMW figure 14 LO E XTR ADING ONICS ON ARE

sec. ~4 sec. 2 sec. 30 SMP 35xFW INITIALIZING SMP 352 E XTR ON V1.06 PRESS NEXT EXIT MENU? PRESETS sec. 45 Presets Menu (to submenus) 1(;7 0(18 0(18 • • • • • The presets menuallowstheusertosaveorrecall encoderanduserpresets. Panel MenuDiagrams A completeschematicofthemenusandsubmenusis in thereference section (see Submenu detailswithconfigurationandoptionsforeach settingare onthefollowingpages. next submenu. to exitthesubmenuandreturn tothecurrently activemenuorpress Press inactivity andreturns tothedefaultcycle. EXIT To returntothedefaultcyclefrom atoplevelmenuorsubmenu,press MENU The toplevelmenusare displayedoneatatime, inorder, ontheLCDpanelbypressing the The flowchartaboveprovides anoverviewof themenusystem. Figure 15. Each successive Press the Figure 14. NOTE: CONTROL PICTURE STATUS 0HQX Press recall orsavetheselection. thesubmenu,use Within Press Press From thedefaultmenu,press times‑out tothedefaultdisplaycycle. front panelbutton. MENU NEXT (to submenus) (to submenus) 1(;7 1(;7

MENU MENU NEXT NEXT From anymenuorsubmenu, after30secondsofinactivity, theSMP 300Series ? when a menu displays to access its submenu. Within thesubmenu,press whenamenudisplaystoaccessitssubmenu.Within shows,thenpress In 11024x768@60 In 3720p@60 Top LevelMenus Default DisplayCycleforDualChannelMode TIME REMAIN 0(18 HH:MM:SS 2 sec. buttononcetobringupthefirstmain(toplevel)menu,asshownbelow. 0(18 toexitthesubmenu. toadvancetherelevant submenu: toenterthesubmenus. MENU RECORD/STREAM CONFIGURA (to submenus) buttonpress cyclestothenextmainmenu. 1(;7 Default Displa VIEW COMM SETTINGS startingonpage 149 sec. 2 sec. 2 (to submenus) 1(;7 TION 1280x720@30 fps NEXT TIME RECORD CHA 5.0MB ADJUST HH:MM:SS MENU f Input 5 + 1(;7 or EditMen 0(18 . Alternatively, themenutimesoutafter30 secondsof y Cyc 0(18 2 sec. tocyclethe controls toselectthepreset, thenpress le u CONFIGURA CONFIGURA SMP 300Series •Front PanelOperations ). ADV 2 sec. 2 sec. INPUT 1280x720@30 fps ANCED CHB 5.0MB (to submenus) 1(;7 (to submenus) TION TION Recall Presets 0(18 0(18 or menu. Save BACKGROUND NEXT . REC MENU ALL tomovethe 1(;7 (to submenus) repeatedly until Mode Only) (F NEXT or Composite Front MENU to 26

figure 16

Encoder presets savethefollowingparameters: applications. resolution andbitrates.There are 32encoderpresets fordifferent streaming andrecording Encoder presets allowuserstoquicklyswitch betweenvariousencoderprofiles fordifferent Encoder presets Figure 16. Profile Level Profile Type Bit RateControl Frame Rate BitRate Video Resolution Video IN<1> USERRECALL ARCHIVE ENCODER IN<1> USERSAVE ARCHIVE ENCODER RECALL SAVE PRESETS NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT Rotate {toselectapreset. input. Rotate [toselectan Rotate {toselectapreset. input. Rotate [toselectan current settingsto. a preset#tosave Rotate eithertoselect select apresettorecall. Rotate eitherto ENCODER PRESETS NEXT Composite Mode Presets Menuin MENU Preset Name GOP Length Record Mode Audio Delay Audio BitRate

SMP 300Series •Front PanelOperations Figure 17. CHA ARCHIVE ENCODER CHA ARCHIVE CHA ARCHIVE ENCODER CHA ARCHIVE IN<1> USERRECALL IN<1> USERSAVE RECALL SAVE PRESETS

NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT Rotate {toselectapreset. input. Rotate [toselectan Rotate {toselectapreset. input. Rotate [toselectan select apresettorecall. encoder. knobto Rotatevertical Rotate horizontalknobtoselect select apresettorecall. encoder. knobto Rotatevertical Rotate horizontalknobtoselect Channel Mode Presets MenuinDual

MENU 27 figure 17

10-32 9 8 7 6 5 4 * 2 1 NOTES: Preset 3 # • • • to theabovetablevalues. The predefined encoderpresets canbemodifiedbytheuser. Ifnecessary, afactory reset allchanges returns Default record modeisvideoandaudio. rate is192kbps. monitoring isnotre-encoded. Therefore, bydefault,therecording usesencoderpreset 3,andtheaudiobit * Audio settingsare determinedbytheencoding fortheprimaryrecording orstream. Audioforconfidence

User Defined 1080p High 1080p Low Confidence 480p High 720p High 480p Low 720p Low VGA High VGA Low Preset Name Default encoderpresets 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. To saveauserpreset from thefront panel: • • • User presets savethefollowingparameters(perinput): There are 16userpresets perinput. input. Userpresets canbesavedononeinput rateandrecalled onadifferent inputrate. User presets savecurrent settingsorrecall previously savedconfigurationsfortheselected User presets Preset 9isthedefaultvalue fortheConfidenceEncoder(Streaming =onbydefault). Preset 3isthedefaultvalue fortheArchive Encoder(ChannelAandChannelB). The firstnineencoderpresets are predefined. Resolution 1280x1024 1920x1080 1920x1080 1024x768 1280x720 1280x720 512x288 848x480 848x480 Contrast Tint Color Press Use theright( Rotate theleft( Press Press Configuration Menu From the NOTE: are available. NEXT NEXT MENU

Picture Only theselectedfront panelchannelAandtheselectedBinputs tosavethenew preset values. tocyclethe tocyclethrough themainmenusto Bit Rate (kbps) Video 2500 3500 1500 2500 3000 5000 6000 8000 { 350 [ ) ADJUST

) Control ADJUST • • • onpage 37 Frame knobtoselectoneofthe16 userpresets. Rate Brightness Aspect ratio Preset name (fps) 15 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 User knobtoselecttheinput. menu,configure theselectedinputasdesired (see

Save Bit Rate ). (kbps) Audio 128 128 128 128 192 128 320 192 80 submenu. SMP 300Series •Front PanelOperations Bit Rate Control CVBR CVBR CVBR VBR VBR VBR VBR VBR VBR Presets Length GOP 15 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 menu. Profile H.264 Base Main Main Main High High High High High H.264 Level Input 3.0 3.1 4.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.2 4.1 28

Picture Control Menu preset numberusingthismenu, theembeddedwebpages,orviaSIS.Select Each inputhassixteenuserpreset locationsavailable.Aconfigurationcanbesavedtoany submenus are availabledependingontheinputselection(seefollowingtable). The Press thesubmenu,use Within submenu displaysthestatusofselectedwindow. control toselectbetweenchannelAandB.The Channel is displayed.Ifbothchannelsare active,usethe In fullscreen mode,onlychannelAorchannel B to thedesired submenu. From the page 22 Layout Presets (ForCompositeModeOnly) and verticalwindowsizefortheselectedinput(see and verticalwindowpositioningalongwithhorizontal composite mode,itallowstheusertoadjusthorizontal settings suchascolor, tint,brightness,andcontrast.In The N/A Each inputhas16userpresets recalled usingthismenu,thewebpages,orviaSIS.Select 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. To recall auserpreset from thefront panel: NEXT Position Tint Color Contrast Brightness Size NOTES: andpress Press Use theleft( Rotate theleft( Press Press • • • Channel Picture toexitwithoutsavingsettings. NOTE: MENU The positionand sizevaluesare forarchive encoding. X * ). are available. indicatesapplicablepicture controls fortheinputtype. Thepositionrangedepends ontheselectedresolution.

Select Picture

NEXT NEXT MENU toexitthesubmenu.

Select Control Only theselectedfront panelchannelAandtheselectedBinputs NEXT toselectthenewpreset fortheinput. tocyclethe tocyclethrough themain menustothe { submenuandeitheradjustment Horz:120 Vert:64 )

Control [ ADJUST toexitwithoutapplyingtheuserpreset settings. submenuisavailableforallinputs.Subsequentpicture control menuincludesallpicture ) 0 0 0 0 ADJUST Range to to to to to * knobtoselectoneofthesixteenuserpresets.

menu,press 127 127 127 127 to 0(18 0(18 ADJUST 4096 User

knobtoselecttheinput. 4096 ENCODER RECALL

ENCODER SA Recall knobstoselectandchangevaluesasrequired. PRESETS YUVp/ HDTV NEXT 1(;7 Press 1(;7tocontinue the ne Press 0(18tosa settings to preset tosa Rotate eithertoselecta Press 1(;7tocontinue selected preset. Press 0(18torecallthe select apreset. Rotate eitherto

X X X X submenu. VE SMP 300Series •Front PanelOperations w preset. tomove on . ve 0(18 current ve YUVi the

Presets X X X X X . . 0(18 0(18 Composite menu. <+0000> HPOSITION[A] NTSC Only CHANNEL SELECT Video CONTROL PICTURE X X X X X 1(;7 1(;7 1(;7 P Rotate ]toadjust P Rotate =toadjustHor on oroff Rotate ]totur Rotate =toselectachannel. osition. osition. V N/A . 0(18 andpress n thechannel HDMI Ve X X X X r tical iz ontal 29

This submenuselectstheinputchannelforremainder ofthesubmenus. Channel select • • To usethissubmenu: This submenuisusedtoadjustthecolorandtintof activevideofortheselectedinput. Color andtint • • selected input.To usethissubmenu: This submenuisusedtoadjustthebrightnessandcontrastofactivevideofor Brightness andcontrast • • selected input.To usethissubmenu: The Picture size(composite modeonly) • • To usethe case itislimitedto-268pixels). screen. Asmallwindow(for example,300pixelswide)cannotgofarintothenegative(inthis range isdynamicallyadjustedtoensure atleast32x32pixelsofthewindowstayon selected channel.Themaximumvaluedependsonthearchive encoderresolution. The This submenusetsthehorizontal(H)andvertical(V)positionofactivevideofor Picture position(compositemodeonly) Rotate either NOTES: for theselected input.Therangeofsettings is Rotate theright( of settingsis When thisconfigurationoption issetto Rotate theleft( input. Therangeofsettingsis Rotate theright( input. Therangeofsettingsis Rotate theleft( selected input.Therangeofsettingsisdependentontheoutputresolution. Rotate theright( selected input.Therangeofsettingsisdependentontheoutputresolution. Rotate theleft( default is selected input.Thevaluerelates tothetopedgeofactivevideo.The Rotate theright( default is the selectedinput.Thevaluerelates totheleftedgeofactivevideo.The Rotate theleft( • • Size not availableforPAL videosignalinputs. is The tintadjustmentisonlyavailableforcompositeNTSC videosignalinputs.Tint The coloradjustmentisonlyavailableforcompositeand YUVvideosignalinputs. submenuisusedtosetthehorizontalandverticalsizeofactivevideofor Picture ADJUST 0000 0000 000 . . [ [ [ [

Position { { { { knobtoselectchannelAandB. to ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST 127 . Thedefaultis submenu: knobtochangetheverticalpositionofvideofor knobtoadjustthetint(appearance ofcolors)thevideo knobtochangethecontrastofvideoforselected knobtochangetheverticalsizeofvideofor knobtochangethehorizontalpositionofvideofor knobtoadjustthecolorof the videoforselectedinput. knobtochangethebrightnessofvideoforselected knobtochangethehorizontalsizeofvideofor 000 000 to to 127 127 064 0 SMP 300Series •Front PanelOperations , colorsappearasshadesof gray. Therange . Thedefaultis . Thedefaultis . 000 to 127 064 064 . Thedefaultis . . 064 . 30

Record andStream ConfigurationMenu • • configuration submenusare dependentonthissetting.Selectoneofthefollowing: This submenudeterminesthepurposeofencoded stream. Thesubsequentencoder Encoder selectmenu submenu selections. depending onprevious are hiddenordisplayed Subsequent submenus CONFIGURATION RECORD/STREAM submenus forthe shows allpossible The flowchartontheright menu. and return tothemain MENU next submenu.Press changes andmovetothe Press to changetheselections. Use either encodes. (recording) andconfidence to configure thearchive This menuallowstheuser Confidence resources. Thesettingsalso applytotherecordings. Archive toenterchanges NEXT ADJUST toenter –Provides thehighestqualitystream butusesthemostbandwidthand menu. –Provides alowerqualitystream, typically for confidencemonitoring.

knob

VID BITRATE AUD <5000> <384> RECORD/STREAM RECORD TO 71.75GB STREAM PROTOCOL CONFIGURATION XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX MULTICAST IP STREAM METHOD ENCODER MODE

figure 18 figure 19

Recording mode • • • to select: Channel storage location.Rotateeitherselectionknobtoselect The Figure 19. Figure 18. NOTE: RECORD/STREAM CONFIGURATION ENCODER MODE Off connected tooneoftheUSB ports(front, rear, orRCP). Secondary Single RECORDING Encoder ENCODER RECORDING –Recording isoff. NEXT NEXT If select encodertype. Rotate eitherto (see –Thearchive stream isrecorded driveonly(default). totheinternal Dual

Recording SubmenusforDualChannelMode Recording SubmenusforCompositeMode Archive figure 19 MENU –Thearchive stream isrecorded driveandthe totheinternal

Channel RECORD/STREAM RECORD TO 71.75GB CONFIGURATION ENCODER MODE modesubmenucontainsoptionsfordirecting therecording toa RECORDING STREAMING ) mode.If RECORD TO 71.75GB ENCODER ENCODER MODE RECORDING STREAMING NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT modeisselected, rotate either knobtoselect Rotate {toselectavolume ontheexternal location. Rotate [toselectAuto, location. orExternal Internal, select mode. Rotate eitherto recordingmode. Secondary Rotate eithertoselectOff, Single, or select encodertype. Rotate eitherto Composite orDualchannelMode. Rotate eithertoselect NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT Rotate {toselectavolume ontheexternal location. Rotate [toselectAuto, location. orExternal Internal, select Off, mode. Single, orSecondary Rotate eitherto select mode. Rotate eitherto Channel Mode. Rotate eithertoselect MENU Composite ENCODER MODE modeisselected,rotate eitherselectionknob SMP 300Series •Front PanelOperations NEXT Composite USBFRONT 2ND RECORD TO 71.75GB

RECORDING REC INTERNAL

TO

X.XX Display only NEXT NEXT

NAME>

GB (see . figure 18 Single ) or or Off Dual .

32 figure 20

Subsequent submenusare availablebasedonthe Embedded Web PagesHelpFile For more informationaboutrecording mediaselection,pleaserefer tothe Figure 20. (see When thatdriveisfull,theSMPusesnextwithavailablespaceinprioritylist are savedtothehighestprioritythathasavailablestoragespacelowest(leftright). four Auto • • • When • • • The Record To (Single) NOTE: ATTENTION: NOTE: < < < available drivespace.Ifthere isnodriveconnected,thesubmenuskipped. External Internal Destination Auto have the4 GBsizelimit,ifunlimitedfileisselected. to 4 GBortherecording creates multiple4GBfiles.FAT32 recording internal doesnot NTFS‑formatted storagevolumes.ForFAT32 USBstorage,filesizesmustbelimited using FAT32, VFAT longfilenameextensions,EXT2,EXT3,EXT4systems,or • • on USBfront, USBrear, andUSBRCPstoragedevices. numbered. Usetheright( Record Destination Start anAd HocRecording modeallowsuserstosettherecording storageprioritybyselectingoptionsfrom the USBRCP USBREAR USBFRONT External engendrer unealtérationou unepertededonnées. Déconnecter unpériphériqueUSBalorsqu’unenregistrement yesteffectué, peut Disconnecting aUSBdevicewhilerecording toitmayresult incorruptorlostdata.

–TheSMPstores therecording tolocationsinorder ofpriorityassetinthe The SMP 300Seriescandetectandrecord toUSBstoragedevices When aUSBdevicehasmore thanonelogicalvolume,eachvolumeis

To [ Recording MediaSelectionandLimit –Selectsthedriveconnectedtofront panelUSBportanddisplaysthe driveanddisplaystheavailablespace. –Selectstheinternal [ VOLNAME submenuselectsthedriveinputisrecorded to.

[ VOLNAME isactive,rotate theleft( VOLNAME

Recording Recording ]> ]> – An external driveconnectedtotheRCPUSBport. –Anexternal ]> – An external driveconnectedtotherear –Anexternal panelUSBport. – An external driveconnectedtothefront –Anexternal panelUSBport. {

Priority Priority ) . ADJUST onpage 59 knobtoselectfrom amongthedifferent volumes drop-down lists. [ drop-down lists(seefigure 20below).Recordings ) SMP 300Series •Front PanelOperations ADJUST ). Recording knobtoselectfrom thefollowing: selection. SMP 300 Series

33 figure 21

Record To (Internal+2nd) encodes haveindependent stream settings. The followingsubmenusappear onlywhentheencoderselectionis Figure 21. submenus are displayeddependingontheprevious submenuselection. MULTICAST (enabled) or Streaming isavailableinbotharchive andconfidenceencodes.Streaming canbe Streaming • • • When • • drives. and external assumes there isaUSBdriveconnected.Theinputalwaysrecorded toboththeinternal The RECORD/STREAM CONFIGURA NOTE: NOTE: STREAM PROTOCOL STREAM METHOD < < < currently connected,thedrive spaceshows External Internal to unicast. Record TSP PULL> USBRCP USBREAR USBFRONT External NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT PUSH, orRT select R Rotate eitherto

on oroff toggle streaming Rotate eitherto TION InDualChannelmode,SecondaryRecording isdisabled. In themenusandsubmenus,

to ne Press NEXTtoselectandmo Rotate eithertoselectprotocol.

IP OFF To [ TSP PULL,R Streaming Submenus . –DisplaystheavailabledrivespaceofconnectedUSBdrive.Ifnois drive. –Displaystheavailabledrivespaceforinternal [ or VOLNAME xt submenu. submenuselectsthedriveinputrecords to.Selecting MENU [ VOLNAME . Whenstreaming isenabled,the isactive,rotate theleft( MP PUSH. VOLNAME DESTINATION -OR- TP ]> ]> – An external driveconnectedtotheRCPUSBport. –Anexternal ]> STREAM PROTOCOL – An external driveconnectedtotherear –Anexternal panelUSBport. XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX – An external driveconnectedtothefront –Anexternal panelUSBport. MUL

TICAST> IP - OR Rotate {tochangeaddress Rotate [toselectoctet. NEXT submenusare available(see MULTI [ ) SMP 300Series •Front PanelOperations ADJUST refers toamulticastprotocol and N/A STREAM . . knobtoselectfrom thefollowing: STREAM PROTOCOL STREAM METHOD XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

DESTINA METHOD TION IP Rotate {tochangeaddress Rotate [toselectoctet. NEXT NEXT figure 21 , STREAM ARCHIVE UNI ES/R UNI UNI from thislist: Rotate eithertoselectprotocol to ne Press NEXTtoselectandmo ). Theappropriate Internal +2nd TS/R TS/UDP

xt submenu. PROTOCOL . Confidence TP TP . UNI ON MUL MUL MUL

refers

TI ES/R TI TI , and TS/R TS/UDP

ve TP 34 TP

Rotate either Stream Method either channels The SMP351withLinkLicenseandthe352allow userstosetthe B The SMP351withoutLinkLicenseallowstheusertoset the Audio Output AUDIO/VIDEO Rotate either video only. When the Output mode • • Enter the When pushstreaming isselected,the Destination IPforpushstreaming • • Enter the with theITdepartmentforcorrect multicastIPaddress foryournetwork. When amulticastprotocol isselected,the Multicast IPforpullmulticast For more information,refer tothe • • • The availablestream protocol followspushorpullstreaming. Stream Protocol NOTE:

ONLY Rotate theright( Rotate theleft( Rotate theright( Rotate theleft( stream name/keyofthepush destination When MULTI UNI When MULTI When Web PagesHelpFile domain name using the web-based user interface (see the , or

TS/UDP DESTINATION MULTICAST ARCHIVE

The destinationcanalsobeconfigured toalocalhostnameorfullyqualified RTMP RTP RTSP A+B ES/RTP RTP/UDP ADJUST ADJUST or

. PUSH

A+B (default), PUSH PULL VIDEO . encoderisselected,anoptionprovided tooutputaudioandvideoor [ [

. DUAL streaming isselected,choose oneofsixoptions: { { knobtoselect: knobtoselectanoutputmode(see

streaming isselected,go to thewebUIenterserverURLand streaming isselected,choose between IP ) ) ) ) .

ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST address: IP fordetails).

MONO UNI address:

TS/RTP or knobtochangetheaddress. knobtoselecttheoctet. knobtoselecttheoctet. knob tochangetheaddress. SMP 300 Series EmbeddedWeb PagesHelpFile B

DUAL PULL , DESTINATION UNI

MONO MULTICAST (default)or

ES/RTP SMP 300Series •Front PanelOperations whenDualMonoforchannelBisenabled. ,

MULTI IP

IP PUSH address mustbeentered. address mustbeentered. Check figure 22

TS/UDP . AUDIO UNI SMP 300 Series Embedded

RTP/UDP

, OUTPUT onthenextpage): MULTI

AUDIO

(default)and toeither TS/RTP

OUTPUT and . A

to ONLY 35 , figure 22

Frame ratesare selected separatelyforthearchive andconfidence encoderconfigurations. a framerateselection(frames persecond)from thefollowing list: Archive andconfidenceencodeshaveindependentframeratesettings.Thismenu provides Frame Rate(video) Recording resolution defaultsto1280x720. There are three typesofencoders-Archive ChannelA,Archive ChannelB,andConfidence. The selectionsare: Archive andconfidenceencodershaveindependentresolution settings. Resolution Figure 22. • • • • • • NOTES: RECORD/STREAM CONFIGURA 6 5 4 3 2 1

Output Rate select ChA,ChBorA+B Rotate eitherto 512x288 848x480 TION Audio OutputSubmenu , orvideoonly MENU • • . . 15 24 -OR- • • • Aspect 1280x720 1920x1080 1280x1024 16:9 16:9 16:9 16:9 5:4 4:3 AUDIO OUTPUT (default) Format Name SMP 300Series •Front PanelOperations • • NEXT select BdualmonoorA+B Rotate eitherto 12 12.5 1080p SXGA WCIF 720p 480p XGA Max FPS • • 30 30 30 30 30 30 5 10 . 36

Input ConfigurationMenu Bit Rate(Video) right). The nextsubmenuselectstheinputsignalformat(seeimageat Input Format submenus thatare visible. configuration. Thisselectiondeterminesthesubsequent number from theactivefront panelinputselectionsforfurther right). Rotateeither The firstsubmenuistheinputselection(seeimageabove Input Select (see imageatright). From the This menuallowstheusertoconfigure eachofthefiveinputs. Rotate theright( allows theusertoselectanaudiobitrateinkbpsfrom thefollowingselections: Archive andconfidenceencodes havethesameaudiobitratesettings. Bit Rate(Audio) Rotate theleft( rate setsatargetvideobitfrom Archive andconfidenceencodes haveindependentvideobitratesettings. • • ** * NOTE: NOTE: Default Input 5isonlyavailableontheSDImodels. * INPUT 192 80 H/V start,active,totalpixelandphasesubmenus do notapply. input type,notallsubmenus(showningrayonsubsequentpages)are available. HDMI/DVI (default) The

Input When there isnoactiveinput,theinputparametersshow #1 Input [

Config { ) ) ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST

Configuration * INPUT HDMI/DVI menu,press

knobtoselectanaudiobitrate. knobtoselectthedesired input knobtoselectthevideobitrate. • • #2 256 96 200 NEXT submenusare inputspecific.Dependingon the * YUVp/HDTV kbpsto Composite INPUT toenterthesubmenu YUVi SMP 300Series •Front PanelOperations

3 10000 kbps(default • • * 320 128 INPUT HDMI/DVI submenus (shown ingray onsubsequentpages) specific. Dependingonthe inputtype, notall areavailable. NOTE: TheInputConfiguration submenus areinput submenus (shown ingray onsubsequentpages) specific. Dependingonthe inputtype, notall areavailable. NOTE: TheInputConfiguration submenus areinput

4 N/A 5000 <1024><0768> <1024><0768> (3) H ACTIVE V (3) TTLPIX PHASE (3) H ACTIVE V (3) TTLPIX PHASE (3) HSTART V (3) HSTART V <128> <16> <128> IN[1] AUDIO SELECT IN[1] AUDIO ASPECT RATIO IN[1] Audio <16> IN[1] AUDIO SELECT IN[1] AUDIO ASPECT RATIO IN[1] <720p_60_2ch> IN[1] AUDIO LEVEL IN[1] AUDIO . Fordigitalinputs, EDID INPUT#[1] <720p_60_2ch> IN[1] AUDIO LEVEL IN[1] AUDIO EDID INPUT#[1] INPUT SELECT INPUT SELECT INPUT #[3] INPUT #[3] Video CONFIG kbps). CONFIG INPUT <0 dB> INPUT <0 dB> <3> <3> active input. EDID value for the Rotate [tosetan selected input. select anaspectratio for the Rotate eitherto Rotate {toadjustphase. Rotate [toadjust TTL pixel width. Rotate {toadjust Vertical Active pixel height. width. Rotate [toadjustHorizontal Active pixel pixel. start Rotate {toadjustthevertical pixel. start Rotate [toselectthehorizontal select theinputformat. Rotate eitherto select input. Rotate eitherto to +24dB. audio inputlevel from-18 Rotate either tosetthe for the selected input. select anaudioinput source Rotate either to active input. EDID value for the Rotate [tosetan selected input. select anaspectratio for the Rotate eitherto Rotate {toadjustphase. Rotate [toadjust TTL pixel width. Rotate {toadjust Vertical Active pixel height. width. Rotate [toadjustHorizontal Active pixel pixel. start Rotate {toadjustthevertical pixel. start Rotate [toselectthehorizontal select theinputformat. Rotate eitherto select input. Rotate eitherto to +24dB. audio inputlevel from-18 Rotate eithertosetthe for theselected input. select anaudio inputsource Rotate eitherto ** * ( NEXT NEXT Auto-SDI HD-SDI 3G-SDI INPUT AUD SDI ( VID ) bitrate MENU MENU ) bit 5 37

Film Detection(interlacedinputformatsonly) • • • are onlyavailableforanalog inputs. currently selectedinput.The signalsamplingsettings Signal samplingoptimizestheinputsignalfor Signal SamplingConfiguration Film detectionmodecannotbedisabledandhasnouseradjustments. window. input. Ifbothinputsare interlaced,priorityisfirsttothelargerwindowsize,ormain If PIPmodeandfilmdetectionare onforbothinputs,thepriorityisgiventointerlace de‑interlaces NTSC,PAL, and1080iinputs. from film.Filmdetectionis validforanyinterlacedinputtype.TheSMP 300Series processing maximizesimage detailandsharpnessforinterlacedsources thatoriginated Input Format Film detectionisautomaticallyenabledwhenaninterlacedinputformatselected(see • • To usethissubmenu: pixels andpixelphaseoftheactivevideoforinput3. TTLPIX • • To usethissubmenu: input 3. is usedtosetthehorizontalactivepixelsandverticallinesofvideofor H • • To usethissubmenu: video forinput3. horizontal andverticalstartpositionsoftheactive start) —Thissubmenuisusedtosetthe H

ACTIVE START input. Therangeofsettingsis Rotate theright( area tobesampledfortheselectedinput. Rotate theleft( for theselectedinput. Rotate theright( for theselectedinput. Rotate theleft( The defaultis the verticalstartlineposition(topedge)ofactivevideoforselectedinput. Rotate theright( default is of theactivevideoforselectedinput.The the horizontalstartpixelposition(leftedge) Rotate theleft( (totalpixels)and (horizontalstart)and (horizontalactivepixels)and ontheprevious page).Filmdetectionsupports2:2and3:2detection.The 128 . 128 [ [ [ { { { . ) ) ) ) ) ) ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST PHASE V

knobtomovethepixelsamplingpointforselected knobtochangetheheight(inlines)ofactivevideo knobtochange (pixelphase)—Thissubmenuisusedtosetthetotal knobtochangethewidth(inpixels)oftotaldisplay knobtochangethewidth(inpixels)ofactivevideo knobtochange START 000 (vertical to V

ACTIVE SMP 300Series •Front PanelOperations 063 submenus (shown ingray onsubsequentpages) specific. Dependingontheinputtype, notall areavailable. NOTE: TheInputConfiguration submenus areinput . Thedefaultis (verticalactivelines)—Thissubmenu <1024><0768> (3) H ACTIVE V (3) TTLPIX PHASE (3) HSTART V <128> <16> IN[1] AUDIO SELECT IN[1] AUDIO ASPECT RATIO IN[1] <720p_60_2ch> IN[1] AUDIO LEVEL IN[1] AUDIO EDID INPUT#[1] INPUT SELECT INPUT #[3] CONFIG INPUT <0 dB> <3> Rotate {toadjust Vertical Active pixel height. width. Rotate [toadjustHorizontal Active pixel pixel. start Rotate {toadjustthevertical pixel. start Rotate [toselectthehorizontal select theinputformat. Rotate eitherto select input. Rotate eitherto active input. EDID value for the Rotate [tosetan selected input. select anaspectratio for the Rotate eitherto Rotate {toadjustphase. Rotate [toadjust TTL pixel width. to +24dB. audio inputlevel from-18 Rotate eithertosetthe for theselectedinput. select anaudioinputsource Rotate eitherto 032 NEXT . MENU 38

Aspect Ratio NOTE: FOLLOW maintained forboth. display is1024x768withanaspectratioof4:3,theinput aspectratioselectioncannotbe For example,ifthearchive resolution is1080pwithanaspectratioof16:9,andtheconfidence outputs. Iftheconfidenceresolution isdifferent, theappliedaspectratiocannot bemaintained. FILL FIT

Aspect Ratio to selectthedesired EDIDfrom the selected inputisdisplayedin thefirstline.Rotateeither three customEDIDsare setto720p@60 Hz, 2‑channelaudio.The EDID emulationisavailable on HDMIinputs1,2and4.Bydefault,all EDID onHDMIConnectors Rotate either The aspectratiocanbechangedperinput.selectedinputisdisplayedinthefirstline. ( its nativeaspectratiowithrespect tothechannelwindow aspect ratio( ( between inputratestofilltheentire windowforthatchannel The The selectedinputaspectratiosettingisappliedtoboth thearchive andconfidence FOLLOW FILL Aspect ), scaleuptofitthechannelwindowandkeeporiginal ). Screen Appearance

Ratio FIT ADJUST ), ortoalloweachinputratedisplayin adjustmentallowstheusertoselect knobtoselect EDID table FOLLOW , SMP 300Series •Front PanelOperations FILL Picture Control Menu the horizontalandverticalsizesettings(see box orpillarbarscanbeappliedbasedon dimension oftheoutputorrecording. Letter vertical dimensionfills,butnotthehorizontal left) remains atitsoriginalaspect ratio.The format (represented bythered blockonthe The inputformatpassesunchanged.A4x3 Description (default) or recording withsomedistortionoftheinput horizontal andverticalscreen oftheoutput to fillthe16x9output.A4x3inputfills The inputformatisnon-uniformlyscaled the dimmedimageoutsidered block. Some lossofimageoccursrepresented by screen withoutletterboxingoraddingpillars. information cropped outinorder tofitthe output withtopandbottomorleftright The inputformatiszoomedtofillthe onthenextpage. (default),and ADJUST submenus (shown ingray onsubsequentpages) specific. Dependingontheinputtype, notall areavailable. NOTE: TheInputConfiguration submenus areinput knob submenus (shown ingray onsubsequentpages) specific. Dependingontheinputtype, notall areavailable. NOTE: TheInputConfiguration submenus areinput FIT <1024><0768> (3) H ACTIVE V fortheselectedinput. (3) TTLPIX PHASE (3) HSTART V <128> <16> IN[1] AUDIO SELECT IN[1] AUDIO ASPECT RATIO IN[1] onpage 29 <720p_60_2ch> IN[1] AUDIO LEVEL IN[1] AUDIO EDID INPUT#[1] INPUT SELECT INPUT #[3] CONFIG INPUT <1024><0768> <0 dB> (3) H ACTIVE V (3) TTLPIX PHASE <3> (3) HSTART V <128> active input. EDID value for the Rotate [tosetan selected input. select anaspectratio for the Rotate eitherto Rotate {toadjustphase. Rotate [toadjust TTL pixel width. Rotate {toadjust Vertical Active pixel height. width. Rotate [toadjustHorizontal Active pixel pixel. start Rotate {toadjustthevertical pixel. start Rotate [toselectthehorizontal select theinputformat. Rotate eitherto select input. Rotate eitherto to +24dB. audio inputlevel from-18 Rotate eithertosetthe for theselectedinput. select anaudioinputsource Rotate eitherto <16> IN[1] AUDIO SELECT IN[1] AUDIO ASPECT RATIO IN[1] <720p_60_2ch> IN[1] AUDIO LEVEL IN[1] AUDIO EDID INPUT#[1] NEXT INPUT SELECT INPUT #[3] CONFIG INPUT <0 dB> <3> active input. EDID value for the Rotate [ selected input. select anaspectratio for the Rotate eitherto Rotate {toadjustphase. Rotate [toadjust TTL pixel width. Rotate {toadjust Vertical Active pixel height. width. Rotate [toadjustHorizontal Active pixel pixel. start Rotate {toadjustthevertical pixel. start Rotate [toselectthehorizontal select theinputformat. Rotate eitherto select input. Rotate eitherto to +24 dB. audio input level from -18 Rotate either to set the for theselectedinput. select anaudioinputsource Rotate eitherto NEXT ). MENU to setan MENU 39 EDID table

EDID 40 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 39 38 37 36 35 34 41 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1920x1200 1680x1050 1600x1200 1600x900 1440x900 1400x1050 1366x768 1360x768 1280x1024 1280x800 1280x768 1024x768 800x600 1920x1200 1920x1080 1680x1050 1600x1200 1600x900 1440x900 1400x1050 1366x768 1360x768 1280x1024 1280x800 1280x768 1280x720 1024x768 800x600 Resolution 1080p 1080p 1080p 1080p 1080i 1080i 720p 720p 576p 480p User LoadedSlot2 User LoadedSlot1 User LoadedSlot3 Refresh Rate 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 24 Hz 50 Hz 25 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz SMP 300Series •Front PanelOperations Rate Type HDTV HDTV HDTV HDTV HDTV HDTV HDTV HDTV HDTV HDTV PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC Video Forma HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI DVI DVI DVI DVI DVI DVI DVI DVI DVI DVI DVI DVI DVI DVI DVI Audio 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 40

Advanced ConfigurationMenu Background RecallMenu(Forcompositemodeonly) Audio Select not thesameinputfrequency hasbeendetectedbefore. When AutoMemoryisoff, Auto-Imageexecuteswhetheror fill thechannelwindowwhenanewinputsignalisdetected. automatically sizesandpositionsincomingvideosignal to variety ofinputsources are likelyencountered. Auto-Image This modeisselectableperinputandusedwhere a Auto-Image RESET ( AUTO ADVANCED The followingflowchartprovides anoverview ofthe the background iscropped tofittheselectedresolution. displays from thetopleftcorner. Ifthefileresolution islarger, smaller thantheselectedoutputresolution, thebackground to applythebackground tothecurrent layout.Ifthefileis Use eitherknobtoscroll through availablefiles.Press using theembeddedwebpagesoranSFTPclient. uploaded tothe and Binputs.Background filesmustbeinPNG formatand A background canbeselectedtorecord withthechannelA line. The defaultvalueis Each audioinputchannelcanbeadjustedfrom Audio Level • • For analogvideoinput3,theaudioformatcanbe: • • • For HDMIinputs1,2,4,and5theaudioformatcanbe: The selectedinputisdisplayedinthefirstline. Each oftheinputshasacorresponding inputaudioformatselection. ON NOTE: or OFF connections. ANALOG OFF screw connections. ANALOG LPCM 2CH detected inputrate. enabled recalls thedefaultsamplingsettingsfor

IMAGE (defaultstofactory). OFF

— —

), Enabling Auto-Imagewhenoverscanisalso CONFIGURATION

( TEST No audio. No audio. ON

AUDIO AUDIO or (default)—Embeddeddigitalaudio(default). Background

PATTERN OFF 0

dB (default)—Analogaudiofrom therear panelcaptivescrew —Analogaudiofrom therear panelcaptive ), . Theselectedinputisdisplayedinthefirst PREVIEW , menu.Optionsinclude RECORD folderoftheSMP 300Series

HDMI

DRIVE

OUT

LIMITER , AUTO SMP 300Series •Front PanelOperations -18

MEMORY

, and dB NEXT to +24

submenus (shown ingray onsubsequentpages) specific. Dependingontheinputtype, notall areavailable. NOTE: TheInputConfiguration submenus areinput submenus (shown ingray onsubsequentpages) specific. Dependingontheinputtype, notall areavailable. NOTE: TheInputConfiguration submenus areinput

dB MENU . MENU <1024><0768> <1024><0768> RECORD DRIVELIMITER (3) H ACTIVE V (3) TTLPIX PHASE (3) H ACTIVE V (3) TTLPIX PHASE (3) HSTART V (3) HSTART V <1280X720@60Hz> <128> PREVIEW HDMIOUT <128> IN<1> AUTO IMAGE IN<1> AUTO <16> IN[1] AUDIO SELECT IN[1] AUDIO ASPECT RATIO IN[1] <16> IN[1] AUDIO SELECT IN[1] AUDIO ASPECT RATIO IN[1] <720p_60_2ch> IN[1] AUDIO LEVEL IN[1] AUDIO <720p_60_2ch> BACKGROUND IN[1] AUDIO LEVEL IN[1] AUDIO EDID INPUT#[1] EDID INPUT#[1] AUTO MEMORY TEST PATTERN INPUT SELECT ADVANCED INPUT SELECT CONFIG INPUT #[3] RECALL INPUT #[3] RECALL CONFIG RESET CONFIG INPUT <0 dB> INPUT <0 dB> <3> <3> active input. EDID value for the Rotate [tosetan selected input. select anaspectratio for the Rotate eitherto Rotate {toadjustphase. Rotate [toadjust TTL pixel width. Rotate {toadjust Vertical Active pixel height. width. Rotate [toadjustHorizontal Active pixel pixel. start Rotate {toadjustthevertical pixel. start Rotate [toselectthehorizontal select theinputformat. Rotate eitherto select input. Rotate eitherto to +24dB. audio inputlevel from-18 Rotate eithertosetthe for theselectedinput. select anaudioinputsource Rotate eitherto active input. EDID value for the Rotate [tosetan selected input. select anaspectratio for the Rotate eitherto Rotate {toadjustphase. Rotate [toadjust TTL pixel width. Rotate {toadjust Vertical Active pixel height. width. Rotate [toadjustHorizontal Active pixel pixel. start Rotate {toadjustthevertical pixel. start Rotate [toselectthehorizontal select theinputformat. Rotate eitherto select input. Rotate eitherto to +24dB. audio inputlevel from-18 Rotate eithertosetthe for theselectedinput. select anaudioinputsource Rotate eitherto NEXT and exit. the background file Press NEXTtoload Rotate eithertoselect. NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT advanced configurations. reboot ortoresetall Rotate eithertoselect the drive restriction. Rotate eithertoselect test pattern. Rotate eithertoselecta OnorOff.Memory Rotate {totoggleAuto a resolution. Rotate eithertoselect Rotate {totoggleonoroff. Rotate [toselectinput. NEXT NEXT NEXT MENU MENU MENU MENU 41

toggle Use theleft( 1024x768 @ 60 Hz inputlookup tableentrycanonlyhaveasingleassociatedAuto Memory. in theinputlookuptable(not basedsolelyonH/Vfrequency). Forexample,theRGBHV of theinput,andH/Vfrequency. AutoMemory locationsassociatewithspecificentries The inputlookuptableidentifies newanaloginputsbasedoninputtype,totalline count active lines,totalpixels,phase,brightness,contrast,color, and tintsettings. input format(forexample, The SMP 300Serieshas16globalmemorylocations, and stores uniqueentriesforeach for theimagetofillscreen, withrespect tothecurrent aspectratiosetting. exists, itperformsanautomaticAuto-Imageonthenewsignal.Thissetsasizeandposition existing AutoMemoryforthesignalisfirstapplied.Ifno entry When enabledandanewinputfrequency isdetected,an source wasdetectedpreviously. the inputtreated asanewsource regardless ofwhetherthe be disablediftheuserdesires tohaveasource appliedto AUTO Auto Memory Press be changed. (default). Theresolution followsthearchive outputandcannot of the Use eitherfront panel Preview HDMIOutput Press auto imaging. to standard Auto‑Imageoperation.Imagesizeandpositionare reset todefaultvaluesafter respect tothecurrent outputresolution. Allinputsamplingsettingsare updatedaccording Fit, theH/Vpositionandsizeare settomaintainthenativeaspectratioofinputin updated according tostandard Auto‑Imageoperation.IftheaspectratioissettoFollow or to 0,0andtheH/Vsizeissetmatchcurrent outputrate.Inputsamplingsettingsare picture controls remain unchanged.Iftheaspectratioissetto Auto-Image affects activepixel,lines,H/Vstart,andphaseconfigurations.Allother luminosity thattheAuto‑Imageroutine definesasactivevideo(default:25%). The valueisglobaltoallanaloginputsontheSMP 300Seriesanddefinesminimum properly withinthechannel window, withrespect tothecurrent aspect ratiosetting. is appliedtothenewsignal.Thissizesandpositionsincomingvideosignaldisplay signal isapplied(if When enabledandanewinputfrequency isdetected,anexistingAutoMemoryforthe NOTE: NOTE: 1280x720, withthevideocontentcentered inthe720pwindow. archive encoderissetas848x480or512x288)theHDMIpreview outputissetto Auto‑Image andMemory commands toAuto‑Imagefilltheoutputandmaintaininputaspectratio(see

MEMORY NEXT NEXT Preview AUTO

When theselectedarchive resolution isunder720lines(forexample,if the Aside from thestandard Auto‑ImageSIScommand,there are unique toselectthevalueandmovenextsubmenu. toselecttheinputvalueandmovenextsubmenu.

[ IMAGE isenabledonallinputsbydefault.Itshouldonly )

ADJUST HDMI AUTO

ON

ADJUST or Output

knobtoselectthedesired input.Ustheright( MEMORY OFF YUVi (default). knobstoselecttherefresh rate . Itcanbeeither versus onpage 114 isenabled).Ifnoentryexists,anautomaticAuto‑Image YUV-HD SMP 300Series •Front PanelOperations ). ). AutoMemorysavesH/Vstart,activepixels, 50

Hz or 60

Hz

MENU MENU FILL , H/Vpositionreturns RECORD DRIVELIMITER RECORD DRIVELIMITER <1280X720@60Hz> PREVIEW HDMIOUT IN<1> AUTO IMAGE IN<1> AUTO <1280X720@60Hz> PREVIEW HDMIOUT IN<1> AUTO IMAGE IN<1> AUTO { AUTO MEMORY TEST PATTERN AUTO MEMORY TEST PATTERN ADVANCED ) ADVANCED ADJUST CONFIG CONFIG RESET RESET NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT advanced configurations. reboot ortoresetall Rotate eithertoselect test pattern. Rotate eithertoselecta the drive restriction. Rotate eithertoselect OnorOff.Memory Rotate { a resolution. Rotate eithertoselect Rotate {totoggleonoroff. Rotate [toselectinput. NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT advanced configurations. reboot ortoresetall Rotate eithertoselect the drive restriction. Rotate eithertoselect test pattern. Rotate eithertoselecta OnorOff.Memory Rotate {totoggleAuto a resolution. Rotate eithertoselect Rotate {totoggleonoroff. Rotate [toselectinput. knobto totoggleAuto MENU MENU 42 figure 23

• • • • down list,orunitpowerisrecycled. isselected, displays untilanotherpattern press Rotate either provided bythedigitalinput. Thisallowsfornon-standard rates(notfoundintheinput Digital inputsare automaticallysetupusinginformationregarding imagesizeandrefresh • • Figure 23. (1.33, 1.78,1.85),anduniversalOSDpatterns. color bars,timestamp,pulse(foraudio),crop aspectratio The SMP 300Seriesoffers appliedperwindow: eightpatterns, troubleshooting. Test are patterns anessentialtoolforconfigurationand Test Patterns Press vertical refresh rate. are savedtoAuto Memory asuniqueentriesbasedonthetotallinecount,H/Vactive,and lookup table)todisplaycorrectly. Digitalinputsthatdonotmatchanexistinglookuptable Aspect Ratio1.33:1 Color Bars It appearsintheupperleftofscreen. Thetextincludesbriefofyourchoice translucent, grayrectangle withwhitetextoverlaidatopthesource video content. Universal OSD(Forcompositemodeonly) centering andsizeadjustment. Aspect Ratio Crop testing. Pulse ofthedisplaywindow.top leftcorner universal OSDtestpattern followed bythree selectableelementsseparatedbycommas(see gray rectangle withtheunitdateandtime(forexample: Time Stamp(Forcompositemodeonly) Color Bars NEXT NEXT –Outlinestheactivepicture area. –Select . The selected test pattern isimmediatelyoutputtothedisplay.. Theselectedtestpattern Thetestpattern toselectthevalueandmovenextsubmenu. ADJUST Test Patterns –Standard fullscreen colorbarsoverlaidontopofthecurrent layout. –Three with screen patterns outlinesin1.33:1, 1.78:1,and1.85:1for Pulse knobtoscroll through Stoponthedesired and thepatterns. pattern )UL $SU Time Stamp Aspect Ratio1.78:1 tooutputanaudiopulseof400Hzat-10dBufor onpage 72 OFF Pulse Aspect Ratio1.85:1 SMP 300Series •Front PanelOperations isselectedfrom the ). –Displayswhitetextinasmall,translucent, – This pattern consistsofasmall, –Thispattern Fri MENU

Apr Cr Universal OSD Test op

18 RECORD DRIVELIMITER <1280X720@60Hz> PREVIEW HDMIOUT IN<1> AUTO IMAGE IN<1> AUTO Setting upthe

AUTO MEMORY TEST PATTERN Pattern HH:MM:SS ADVANCED CONFIG RESET NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT advanced configurations. reboot ortoresetall Rotate eithertoselect the drive restriction. Rotate eithertoselect test pattern. Rotate eithertoselecta OnorOff.Memory Rotate {totoggleAuto a resolution. Rotate eithertoselect Rotate {totoggleonoroff. Rotate [toselectinput. drop- ) inthe MENU 43

Comm Settings(ViewandEdit)Menu Record DriveLimiter SETTINGS COMM SETTINGS simultaneously for3secondsinthe make changes,press andhold The Press submenus forviewingallcommunicationportsettings. The mainmenudefaultstothe to thesettings. communications ports.Ahiddenmenuallowschanges of thecurrent serialportandIPsettingsforthe The two the front panelLCDdisplays A reset or reboot confirmation message appears before the reset orreboot. After confirming, • • reboot. Theselectionsare: The Reset Menu Config Based onthetoplevelselection, • • The followinglimitationscanbeselected: automatic. Configure therecord drivelocationstobelimitedorfully Reboot defaults withthecurrent firmware. Resets To ON and anyconnecteddrives. OFF VIEW Reset

SETTINGS onpage 31 NEXT

Factory offers different record driveoptions(see ( Comm not restricted, default)–Record memory tointernal

menu. menuoranyofthesubmenus.The COMM submenuprovides afactoryreset orfirmware tocyclethrough thesubmenu.

onpage 108 Unit

Settings

menuchangestothe SETTINGS –Equivalenttoa –Identicaltoapowercycle. ). menusprovide astatus ). Theunitisreset tofactory submenuisread‑only. To Resetting/Rebooting VIEW NEXT ZQQQ VIEW

and COMM REC EDIT command(see

LOCATION COMM INPUT

SETTINGS

COMM SMP 300Series •Front PanelOperations VIEW

Record andStream Configuration 5

submenuunder

Unit . MENU MENU 9600 RS232 255.255.000.000 000.000.000.000 192.168.254.254 VIEW COMM 005A6078CEC MAC ADRESS SERIAL PORT On DHCP MODE EDIT COMM SETTINGS SETTINGS GATEWAY SUBNET IP ADDR “Hidden” Menu* RECORD DRIVELIMITER Record/Stream <1280X720@60Hz> PREVIEW HDMIOUT IN<1> AUTO IMAGE IN<1> AUTO NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT Rotate either Rotate DHCP modeOnorOff. Rotate eithertotoggle changed. (Skippedin “Edit” mode.) This issetatthefactoryandcannotbe the baudrate. Rotate eithertochange Rotate Rotate Rotate RECORD DRIVELIMITER <1280X720@60Hz> AUTO MEMORY TEST PATTERN PREVIEW HDMIOUT IN<1> AUTO IMAGE IN<1> AUTO ADVANCED AUTO MEMORY TEST PATTERN CONFIG ADVANCED RESET { [ { [ CONFIG RESET to changeaddress. to changeaddress. to selectoctetfield. to selectoctetfield. NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT advanced configurations. reboot ortoresetall Rotate eithertoselect the drive restriction. Rotate eithertoselect OnorOff.Memory Rotate {totoggleAuto a resolution. Rotate eithertoselect Rotate {totoggleonoroff. Rotate [toselectinput. test pattern. Rotate eithertoselecta for 3seconds. INPUT 5+NEXT Press andhold

NEXT to changemask. NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT advanced configurations. reboot ortoresetall Rotate eithertoselect the drive restriction. Rotate eithertoselect test pattern. Rotate eithertoselecta OnorOff.Memory Rotate {totoggleAuto a resolution. Rotate eithertoselect Rotate {totoggleonoroff. Rotate [toselectinput. MENU

MENU 44

Change anAddress GATEWAY restarts toreflect thechangesafterpressing or the changesandreturn tothe When youare donewiththechanges,press 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. desired address (IPaddress shown). Enter the and GatewayIPaddress ( To changetheIPaddress ( NOTE: NEXT ADJUST Change theselectedoctetvalueusingright( illustration atright( knob. Theselectedoctetblinks,shownin Make thenextoctetselectionwithleft( ADJUST Change theselectedoctetvalueusingright( illustration atright, knob. Theselectedoctetblinks(shownin Make thenextoctetselectionwithleft( ADJUST Change theselectedoctetvalueusingright( illustration atright, knob. Theselectedoctetblinks(shownin Make thenextoctetselectionwithleft( ADJUST Change theselectedoctetvalueusingright( illustration atright, knob. Theselectedoctetblinks(shownin Make theoctetselectionwithleft( ADJUST tosubmitthevalue.Thenetworkconnection

submenu. EDIT The subnetmaskischangedusingeither knob( knob( knob( knob( knob.

COMM 8 6 4 2

SETTINGS ). ). ). ). 7 3 1 5 ). GATEWAY ). ). ). IP

ADDR EDIT menuandnavigatetothe ): ), SubnetMask( 2 1 4 4 3 3 2

COMM XXX. IP XXX.XXX XXX. IP 192.168 XXX. IP 192.XXX XXX. IP 192.XXX

SETTINGS [ Rotate {tochangeaddress Rotate [toselectoctet. Rotate {tochangeaddress Rotate [toselectoctet. NEXT MENU SMP 300Series •Front PanelOperations ) Bold Bold Bold Bold ADJUST [ [ [ from the tocancel ) ) ) SUBNET inthe inthe inthe inthe ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST menu { { { { ) ) ) )

),

. . 6 5 5 8 8 7 7 6 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 XXX. IP 192.168 XXX. IP XXX.XXX XXX. IP 192.168 XXX. IP 192.XXX XXX. IP 192.XXX 254.XXX IP 192.168 254.XXX IP 192.168 254. IP 192.168 Rotate {tochangeaddress Rotate [toselectoctet. Rotate {tochangeaddress Rotate [toselectoctet. Rotate {tochangeaddress Rotate [toselectoctet. Rotate {tochangeaddress Rotate [toselectoctet. 45 . . . . 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5

XXX. IP 192.168 254.XXX IP 192.168 254.XXX IP 192.168 254. IP 192.168 Rotate {tochangeaddress Rotate [toselectoctet. Rotate {tochangeaddress Rotate [toselectoctet. . .

Exit Menu Status Menu the menuandreturn tothedefaultcycle. From thissubmenu,press Press • • • • • confidence streams. drive capacity, andbitratesforarchive and free andexternal spaceandtotalinternal including activealarms,recording filenames, submenus thatshowthecurrent unitstatus The OUTPUT drive. size andfree spaceonaconnectedUSB SELECTED either MBorGB. shown inthree digitswithtwodecimalsin the selectedUSBdrive.Thecapacityis hardtotal spaceontheinternal driveand DRIVE present. N/A characters, thefilenamescrolls. Itshows If thefilenameislongerthansixteen being writtentoorthelastfilecreated. ARCHIVE None alarms. Ifnoalarmsare present, itshows ALARM STATUS NOTE: NEXT ifnoneworcurrent recordings are filename isdisplayedasawhiteblock. .

SPACE STATUS toreturn tothe

menucontainsread-only STREAM

—Displaysfilenamescurrently

A non-ASCIIcharacterina VOLUME —Indicatesthefree and —Scroll through theactive —Displaysthevideobitrateandprotocol oftheoutputstream.

NAME MENU STATUS —Displaysthe toreturn tothe menu. SMP 300Series •Front PanelOperations PRESETS MENU menucycle,orpress [NONE, HDCP SELECTED USBFRONT SELECTED [ARCH] BR5000kbps CHA BR5000kpbs CHA BR5000kpbs [FREE/TOT [FREE/TOT [FREE/TOT CONF BR350kbps DRIVE SP [...FILENAME...] ALARM ST MUL MUL MUL UNI R ARCHIVE STATUS TI R TI R TI TP/UDP TS/R VOLNAME TP/UDP ACE INT TP/UDP AL] [GB] AL][GB] AL][GB] NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT , A VIDEO TUS TP ...] MENU NEXT PRESS NEXT EXIT MENU? toexit 46 figure 24

Alarms Front PanelLockout(Executive Modes) four modes. select fromthe Rotate eitherto generated bytheSMP 300Series,whattheymean,and howtheyare cleared. (see The front panelalarmsdisplaylistsalertsforeventsasdeterminedinthewebpage corresponding totheactiveexecutivemode(seefollowingtable). In addition,whenexecutivemodeisenabled,thefront panelbuttonschangecolor SELECT When executivemodeisenabled,simultaneouslypress Figure 24. page 99 controlRS-232, orEthernet (see When executivemodeisactive,allfunctionsandadjustmentscanstillbemadeviaUSB, mode 3,and4(Executiveoff). Executive modebeginsin1.Rotateeither The menusystemreturns tothedefaultmenuwithin10seconds. MARK To prevent accidentalchangestofront panelmenusettings,simultaneouslypress NOTE: NOTE: Executive All frontpanelcontrolsdisabled. MODE 1: COMPLETELOCK Executive modeOFF (see executive mode. Alarms andTraps SELECT EXEMODE for3 secondstoenablefront panellockoutmode. Mode Off DEFAULT

3 2 1 CYCLE EXE ).

Alarms All activealarmscanbemanuallycleared byanadministratorviathewebpage Control buttonsindicatethecurrent recording orstreaming statusregardless of for 3seconds. Press MENU+MARK

Executive mode1. NEXT toenter MODE Front PanelLockout(ExecutiveMode) onpage 94 submenu.Thecurrent executivemodestatus islistedinthissubmenu. Executive Mode OFF (nolockout) Record ctrlonly Complete lock Menu lockout Description onpage 82 active. menus. Selectionbuttons are No accesstothefrontpanel MODE 2: MENULOCKOUT

SELECT EXEMODE ). Remote CommunicationandControl Executive mode2. NEXT toenter ). The Active Input Alarm Buttons Amber Amber Amber Amber SMP 300Series •Front PanelOperations buttons areavailable. Record, Pause, Stop, andMark MODE 3: RECORDCTRLONLY ADJUST tableonthenextpagelistsalarms SELECT EXEMODE Executive mode3. NEXT toenter MENU knobtocyclemode2,then Preset/Swap and Layout Amber Amber Off Off MARK (default). Executive modeisdisabled MODE 4: OFF todisplaythe SELECT EXEMODE startingon Menu/Next mode offandexit. ExecutiveNEXT toturn Amber On Off Off MENU and 47

Video Loss (keyboard andmouse) USB Overcurrent (front andrear USB) USB Overcurrent Temperature Internal Sched Server Record Halt NTP Sync HDCP Video Firmware Failure Disk Space Disk Error Auth Failures Audio Loss Alarm

• • or keyboard exceedsthe0.5Alimitofports. A USBportcurrent drawofaconnectedmouse of theports. A USBportcurrent drawexceedsthe1.5Alimit 2 minutes. temperatureThe SMPinternal exceeds60°Cfor scheduling server. There isanerror communicatingwiththe stop. A recording isterminatedwithoutacommandto • • active input. cannot negotiateHDCPforanyreason onan The signalisHDCPprotected and theSMP • • • • • • • of userIDs(includingnon-existentIDs). attempts within20secondsonanycombination authentication, withamaximumof20failedlogin Telnet, API,SFPT, SISviaSSH)thatrequire Any combinationofaccessinterfaces(webpage, • • One oftheseoccurduringarecording: be establishedwithina2 seconds limit. The inputischangedandvideo synccannot an inputchange. period of0.5secondsthatisnottheresult of syncislostduringarecordingVideo fora SMP failsmultiplemanualsyncattempts. primary andretry attempts. with theconfigured NTPserverand failsthe The SMPattemptstoautomaticallysync It isa operation. A failure tostartacriticalportion ofSMP space torecord atthestartofanevent. The targetvolumedoesnothavesufficient < USBstoragevolumedropsThe external to storage). does notdetectanyexternal example: Target storagevolumeisnotfound(for protected drive). selected storagevolume(forexample:awrite A read orwriteerror isdetectedonthe recovered. or more read orwriteerrors thatcannotbe systemstoragevolumeregistersInternal one triggers after10seconds. Audio islostduringarecording, thealarm recording. triggers after5minutesofthestart -60 dBFS) before arecording starts,analarm Audio isabsent(signalatorbelow 10 minutes ofrecording timewhilerecording. Notify USBFront Alarm Generated alarmbydefault. isselectedbuttheSMP SMP 300Series •Front PanelOperations • • • alarms page 82 the webpage(see Can onlybecleared byanadministratorvia • • Video syncisdetectedforabout2seconds. Video The offending deviceisremoved from theSMP. The offending deviceisremoved from theSMP. The SMPtemperature drops below50°C. schedulingconfiguration is set. alternate The connectiontotheserverisrestored oran page 82 the webpage(see Can onlybecleared byanAdministrator via period offivesynchronization attempts. The NTPsyncsucceedswithoutretries fora off theinput. The HDCPsource isnolongeractive oristaken triggered. Contact Extron Supportwhenthis alarmis • • Remove thewriteprotection from thevolume. Choose adifferent targetstoragevolume. Replace theaffected USBstorage. The recording sessionends. dBFS foracontiguousperiodof60seconds. The audiosignalismaintainedabove-60 with adequatespace. targetstoragevolume Choose analternate adequate space(USBdrive). Replace theaffected storagewith onehaving onpage 107 ) orSIScommands(see ). Alarm Cleared Alarms andTraps Alarms andTraps ). Clear active on on 48 Web-Based User Interface

This section provides information about: • Overview of the Web-Based User Interface • Accessing the Web-Based User Interface • Logging Out and Logging In • AV Controls Panel • Recording Controls • Scheduled Events • Configuration • File Management • Troubleshooting • Mirroring LinkLicense Overview of the Web-Based User Interface The SMP 300 Series embedded web pages provide the software user interface for operating and configuring the SMP via a PC on the same network. NOTE: In figure 25, the home page for a standard SMP 300 Series device is shown. If the Horizontal Video Mirroring LinkLicense is purchased, there will be an additional Mirroring LinkLicense tab and Horizontal Video Mirroring Status section. figure 25

Figure 25. SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 49 These web pages provide the following features: • Ability to fully configure the SMP. • Ability to import a schedule, integrate schedules from a scheduling system, or create ad hoc recordings. • Ability to update firmware. • Ability to configure automatic uploads (publishing) of completed recordings to a designated server or video publishing system. • Remote control and active monitoring of the SMP. • A small embedded video window to view the AV content that is being recorded and streamed. • Access to upload background files to and download or transfer presentation recordings from the SMP. • Ability to display alarm history and allow administrators to clear active alarms. • Ability to upload and install a LinkLicense on an SMP 351 or SMP 351 3G-SDI (see Extron LinkLicense on page 3). Web Browser Requirements In order to view the SMP 300 Series embedded web pages, use one of the supported web browsers (and versions) listed below.

NOTE: The preview video in the AV Controls panel of the SMP uses an HTML5 player and is not supported by Microsoft Internet Explorer v.11, Microsoft Edge, or Apple Safari. To see a preview of the current stream you can either: • Use a different browser, or • Open a standalone, third-party video player (such as VideoLAN™ open source VLC™ media player) and connect to the confidence stream from the SMP.

• Google Chrome version 48 or higher • Mozilla Firefox version 44 or higher • Microsoft Edge • Microsoft Internet Explorer version 11 or higher (for Windows operating systems)

NOTE: If you are using Internet Explorer, compatibility mode must be turned off (see Turning Off Compatibility Mode below).

• Apple Safari version 9 or higher (for macOS operating systems) NOTE: Safari is the preferred browser for macOS operating systems, but it does not support playback in the AV Controls Preview window at this time.

Turning Off Compatibility Mode The SMP 300 Series embedded web pages do not support compatibility mode in Microsoft Internet Explorer. To check compatibility view settings: • From the browser, select Tools > Compatibility View Settings. The Compatibility View Settings dialog box opens. • Be sure that the Display intranet sites in Compatibility View checkbox is cleared and the IP address of the SMP 300 Series is not in the list of compatibility view sites.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 50 Web-Based User Interface Help Files The SMP 300 Series web-based user interface contains an extensive set of help files to assist with the connection, configuration, monitoring, and operation of the SMP 300 Series. The following sections contain an overview of those files and also include information not contained in the help files. Accessing the Web-Based User Interface To access the embedded web page user interface: 1. Connect a control PC to the LAN port of the SMP 300 Series, or to the same network shared by the SMP. 2. Open a web browser. 3. Enter the IP address of the SMP 300 Series (the default IP address is 192.168.254.254) into the browser address field. 4. Enter the username and password to log in. 5. Click Log In or OK. figure 26 The main user interface opens to the Recording Controls page (see figure 26).

Figure 26. SMP 300 Series Main User Interface

NOTE: In figure 26, the home page for a standard SMP 300 Series device is shown. If the Horizontal Video Mirroring LinkLicense is purchased, there will be an additional Mirroring LinkLicense tab and Horizontal Video Mirroring Status section displaying the status of the horizontal mirroring of each input.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 51 Page Overview The SMP 300 Series pages are organized by function and further organized within those main functions. Click the tabs to open the pages.

Tabs The pages in the SMP 300 Series are grouped within five main tabs at the top of the page: figure 27

Figure 27. Five Main Function Tabs 1 Recording Controls (see page 61) — This single page provides a view of the status of currently selected inputs and outputs, along with details of the active recording and stream (the current event), and a table-style list of upcoming scheduled events. The URLs of the streams are also displayed on this page. 2 Scheduled Events (see page 63) — This tab features three pages that provide a calendar view of previous and upcoming recording events, as well as scheduling and publishing configuration options. 3 Configuration (see page 66) — The eight pages within this tab contain the core controls typically needed during initial setup, upgrading the unit, or restoring a configuration. These pages make it possible for an administrator to configure basic AV input settings: • Output video test patterns for setup. • Configure output stream settings and presets. • Set up AV encoding and presets. • Select or configure layouts and layout presets. • Set passwords. • Set up notices and alarms. • Select preview window settings. The Configuration pages also provide the means to configure basic communication, identity, time, data storage, and recording location settings, along with making it possible to update firmware or restore a configuration from a saved file. 4 File Management (see page 89) — This page provides the means to view folders and files on the internal drive and any attached external drive, and to upload background image files to the unit. It also provides the means to connect the SMP to shared network drives. 5 Troubleshooting (see page 91) — The five pages within this tab display factory- defined and user-defined information about the unit and the encoded streams, display a log of events and a log of alarms and their status, provide two simple diagnostic tools for checking network connections, and provide the means to perform a variety of types of resets on the SMP. 6 Mirroring LinkLicense (see page 97)— If the unit has been upgraded with the Horizontal Video Mirroring LinkLicense, there will be a sixth tab with two panels. This page allows the user to enable horizontal video mirror on each input, adjust the minimum available recording time available on a storage device, and set a start recording delay. NOTE: Users logged in as administrators can access all the embedded web pages and subpages. User logged in as users can access only the Recording Controls page and the AV Controls panel.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 52 Pages Within Tabs The Scheduled Events, Configuration, and Troubleshooting tabs each include several pages. To access each page, click the corresponding function within the second tier of tabs (sub-tabs) located below the main tabs near the top of the page (Configuration > Input/ Output Settings shown selected in figure 28). figure 28

Figure 28. Pages Within Tabs — Sub-tabs

Panels and Sections Each SMP 300 Series web page contains at least one panel and a main window with sections that group the controls and information for each page. Most panels include controls and a variety of adjustments and settings. Specific sections can include controls or simply display information. Sections or panels can include tabs with additional selections and options. All SMP 300 Series web pages include the AV Controls panel at the left of the page (see AV Controls Panel on page 55). The Recording Controls page is the main page and also serves as the main operating interface. It contains one panel and three sections. Pages such as the Systems Settings page within the Configuration tab include several panes, each with a different collection of information and settings.

Collapse and expand panes Click the Expand (see figure 29, 1) arrow button on the right side of a pane. The pane opens to a full view, or as much as possible with the current display settings. Click the Collapse (2) arrow button at the top corner of a pane to collapse it. This hides the controls and provides additional room for other panes. figure 29

Figure 29. Collapsed and Expanded Panes

NOTE: For some pages, the last-selected view is maintained. If you navigate away from one page to a different tab or page, and then return, the page appears as it did before leaving the page. Panes automatically collapse each time you leave and return.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 53 Web Page Idle (Timeout) To conserve resources (memory, bandwidth) on the PC, if the web browser is idle for more than about an hour, the SMP 300 Series web page enters idle mode. During idle mode, status updates and video confidence (preview) display image updates are suspended, and the following message is displayed in front of the page: figure 30 Idle

Communication with the device is being temporarily suspended to conserve resources. Please press “Resume” to continue.

Resume

Figure 30. Communication Suspended Notification Dialog

NOTE: The idle status does not affect the recording or the output AV streams, which continue unaffected, no matter what state (active or idle) the web pages are in.

To reconnect the web page to the live feed from the SMP 300 Series, click Resume. In a moment, the browser refreshes the view, the status updates, and video confidence display resume.

NOTE: If the SMP 300 Series loses the network connection, the connection to the embedded web pages is also lost. You may receive notice of the connection failure, but there is no specific status indication for disconnection.

Logging Out and Logging In Before changing roles (from administrator to user, or user to administrator) or changing user accounts, log out of the embedded web pages. The user or administrator status is displayed in the upper right corner of all web pages. The Logout button shows only if one or more passwords is active. To log out of the web pages: 1. From any embedded web page, click the Logout button at the upper right of the browser page. A Logout dialog box opens. 2. Click OK to log out of the SMP 300 Series web pages, or click Cancel to remain logged on using the same account. The Logout dialog closes and returns you to the embedded web pages. NOTE: • If you click Cancel, you remain logged in and the embedded web pages continue to function as they did before you clicked Logout. • If you click OK, the controls are replaced by a message confirming that you are logged out and asking you to close the browser. Close the browser completely. If you close only a tab within the browser, the logout process does not complete. • Some browsers, such as Google Chrome, include an option to continue running in the background after closing. If this is enabled on Windows, the browser can be exited completely using the taskbar notification icon.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 54 To log in to an SMP 300 Series: 1. Open a web browser. 2. Enter the IP address of the SMP into the address field and navigate to that unit. The Authentication Required (Chrome or Firefox) or Windows Security (Internet Explorer) login dialog box opens. 3. Enter the appropriate user or administrator user name and corresponding password into the fields. 4. Click Log In or OK. The embedded web page opens.

AV Controls Panel The AV Controls panel is available on every page and within all tab views. Located along the left side of the pages, this panel makes it possible to easily control a recording, see a thumbnail view of the recorded and output video, swap video content between windows, select different inputs, and mute or unmute the AV output. The browser always opens with the AV Controls panel expanded and both presenters and administrators have access.

AV Controls Panel Features The AV Controls panel includes the following features:

Preview This area (see 1, at right) provides a small, live stream view of the output video so you know what is being 2 recorded. It is delayed by about 5 seconds compares to 3 the recording and the output stream. 1 4 The live preview stream is independent of the streaming settings configured in the Encoding Presets pane (see Encoding & Layout on page 75). 5 NOTE: The preview video in the AV Controls panel of the SMP uses an HTML5 player and is not supported by Microsoft Internet Explorer v.11, Microsoft Edge, or Apple Safari. To see a preview of the current stream either: • Use a different browser or • Open a standalone, third-party video player (such as VideoLAN opensource VLC media player) and connect to the stream from the SMP.

• Disabling the preview window — To make the embedded web pages faster to refresh, the live preview can be disabled. The recording and output streams continue to be streamed when this preview is disabled. To disable the live feed to this preview, clear (uncheck) the Enable Preview checkbox (2) above the preview window. To display the preview again, select (check) the Enable Preview checkbox. The confidence stream for the preview can also be disabled using front panel controls (see Front Panel Menu Operation on page 25).

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 55 • Separate preview window — To open the live preview in a separate, larger window, click the Launch Preview button (see 3 on the previous page) in the upper right corner of the AV Controls panel. When the separate live preview window opens, preview audio is enabled and the preview window within the panel is disabled. If you close the separate live preview window, select (check) the Enable Preview checkbox (2) again to display the preview stream within the panel. • Full screen preview — To display the preview in full screen view, double-click the preview image in the AV Controls panel. To exit full screen view, press the keyboard key.

Swap (For composite mode only) Click the Swap button (4) to make video from channel A trade window locations with video from channel B.

NOTE: The Swap button in the AV Controls panel is disabled when the SMP is in dual channel encoding mode. The Swap button on the front panel is disabled during recording when the SMP is in dual channel encoding mode.

Preview mute By default, the audio portion of the preview is muted, which does not affect audio to the recording and web streams. To listen to the audio that accompanies the preview, click the preview audio Mute button (5) to change from muted (default) to unmuted (see figure 31): figure 31

Figure 31. Mute Button Recording controls Recording control buttons function the way controls do on a DVR or other recording device. Buttons include (see figure 32): figure 32

Figure 32. Recording Control Buttons • Record — Set up an ad hoc* recording session and start or resume recording. • Pause — Pause recording. • Extend — Extend the duration of a recording event by ten minutes beyond the scheduled end time. NOTE: The Extend Recording button only applies to scheduled recordings.

• Stop — Stop recording and end the recording session. *An ad hoc recording session is one that has been set up for a specific occasion without being scheduled. Ad hoc recordings can last up to eight hours. Text above the buttons lists the status of the recording: recording, paused, or stopped. A button is blue when selected (active or on) and gray when deselected (inactive or off). • Mark — This button works like the Mark button on the front panel of the SMP. It is grayed out and inaccessible when the unit is not recording, and becomes accessible and clickable once a recording starts. When you click this button during a recording, you create a time-referenced chapter marker to make it easy to find content at that point in the recording during playback. When you click the button, the button becomes unavailable (grays out). The button reactivates after a brief delay (about five seconds) while unit stores the marker information.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 56 NOTE: The front panel buttons also indicate the recording state, mirroring the AV Control panel indicators3 (see Front Panel Features on page 20).

Progress bar figure 33 1

2 Figure 33. Progress Bar and Recording Time Available A progress bar (see figure 33, 1) below the recording control buttons is a horizontal bar graph that shows how much recording time has elapsed and, if it is a scheduled session rather than an ad hoc recording, how long the presentation is expected to last. For an ad hoc recording, initially the progress bar shows a five minute duration. The displayed duration increases in five-minute increments as the ad hoc recording progresses.

Recording time available Recording time remaining (2) is indicated below the progress bar in the format HHH:MM:SS. The estimate of how much time remains available is based on the combination of available storage space and the current stream resolution and bit rate. During a scheduled recording, this field indicates how much time remains in the event. During an ad hoc recording, the calculated time is displayed. If dual recording mode is enabled, the remaining time is listed first for the internal storage drive1 and then for the selected secondary (external USB) drive (132:46:27*00:03:44, for example). 2 Input selection, mute controls, audio indication, and auto-image Inputs are grouped into two3 channels: • Channel A (see figure 34, 1) — Composed of input 1 (HDMI) and input 2 (HDMI). • Channel B (2) — Composed of input 3 (component/composite), input 4 (HDMI), and optional input 5 (3G/HD/SDI) for the SMP 351 3G-SDI and SMP 352 3G-SDI. There is one analog audio input per channel. HDMI inputs can be configured for digital audio (embedded in HDMI) or a shared analog input for the channel. The audio type for each input is displayed in the right column (4). figure 34 1 4

2 5

3

Figure 34. Active Inputs, Mute, Audio, and Auto-image Audio format (Off, Digital Stereo or Analog Stereo) must be configured in the Input/ Output Settings page (see Input/Output Settings on page 68). To select AV sources: 1. Click the input buttons (see figure 34, 1 and 2) in the left column of the Active Inputs area to select AV sources for a presentation. Input changes take effect immediately.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 57 2. To apply Auto-Image to input 3, click Auto-Image (see figure 34, 5 on the previous page). Auto‑Image automatically sizes and centers the selected input to match the channel B window. 3. Click the desired button (3) to mute video only (Video Mute), audio only (Audio Mute), or both audio and video (Mute All). When a mute mode is selected (active), the corresponding button or buttons are red. Click the buttons to toggle mute states, use the front panel controls, or send SIS commands to the unit via RS-232 or USB control. When unmuted, the button changes from red to gray. 4. To enable the meters, select the Enable Meter checkbox below the meters (see figure 35. Left and right channel indicators display the audio output level (in dBFS) when there is an active audio output. The boxes at the top of the meters are red when audio clipping occurs and black when audio is not clipped. figure 35

Figure 35. Audio Output Meter

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 58 Start an Ad Hoc Recording A user logged on to the SMP, either at the user level or the administrator level, can initiate an ad hoc (unscheduled) recording. To start an ad hoc recording from the AV Controls panel, see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File.

NOTES: • For more information about single and dual storage modes, see Setting the Default Recording Media on page 84) within Configuration > System Settings. • If the unit is set for recording destination limiting, users do not have the option to select a different storage location. The storage location or locations are preselected and cannot be changed from this dialog box. • If the recording is restricted to a USB device with multiple partitions, then partition selection within the USB drive is still available. • Ad hoc recordings can last up to eight hours. At the end of eight hours, the SMP stops recording.

Recording Destination Options If the unit is set for single storage mode (recordings are saved to only one storage drive), choose a recording destination from the Recording Destination drop-down list (see figure 36). figure 36

Figure 36. Ad hoc Recording Destination Dialog, Single Recording Destination • If the unit is NOT set to limit the recording destination, recording destination options are as follows: • auto — The recording is saved to the first available storage location that is not full. The priority is front USB port, rear USB port, internal memory. If a USB drive has more than one logical volume, only the volume with the largest free space for that port in the Recording Destination drop-down list is used to store content. To record to another volume on the device, the target location must be manually select rather than using the auto option. • internal — The recording is saved in the internal memory of the SMP. • external-usbfront/usbrear/VOLUME2/, usbrear/VOLUME1/, usbrear/NEW_ VOLUME, usbrcp/volume3, and so forth — The recording is stored to the indicated external USB drive and volume (using whatever volume name is on that drive) connected to the front panel or rear panel USB storage port on the SMP. • If the unit is set to limit the recording destination, you cannot change the storage location (internal, front USB, rear USB, RCP USB). However, if the unit is set to store recordings to one of the USB ports, and if the connected drive contains more than one volume, you can select a volume from the Recording Destination drop-down list.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 59 If the unit is set for secondary storage mode, the file is saved to two storage drives simultaneously. In dual recording mode, the recording is always saved to the internal drive as the primary storage location; only the secondary location is configurable. figure 37

Figure 37. Ad Hoc Recording, Secondary Recording Destination Selection Select the secondary storage location from the drop-down list (see figure 37). • If the unit is set to restricted mode, you can select only from front panel USB drives or from rear panel USB drives, depending on whether the front or the rear option is selected in the system settings. If the unit is set to use a front panel USB drive for the secondary storage location but a drive is connected to the rear panel USB port instead of the front panel port, the Secondary Recording Location: drop‑down list displays n/a (not available or not applicable) as the only option. • If the unit is NOT set for restricted mode, you can select any available USB drive and volume. • If no USB drive is attached to a particular port, the option for that port is either not shown at all or is shown as n/a.

Recording Profile and Metadata After selecting the recording destination, a preconfigured, saved recording profile can be selected or metadata can be entered for the ad hoc recording (see figure 38). NOTE: When a recording profile is selected from the drop-down list, the metadata fields are grayed out. figure 38

Figure 38. Ad Hoc Recording Profile and Metadata

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 60 Recording Controls The Recording Controls page displays information about the active inputs and the output signal, the presentation event currently in progress, and a list of upcoming presentations. Information on this page updates every few seconds. Contents of the page are read-only and are displayed for all users. This page contains five panels and AV Controls (see figure 39): 1 Stream URL — The URL for the unicast and multicast streams currently in progress. 2 Storage Information — The location or locations and size of the stored file or files. 3 System Inputs and Outputs — The input and output signal parameters. 4 Current Event — The presentation currently in progress. 5 Upcoming Events — A list of upcoming scheduled events for the day. 6 AV Controls — Start an ad hoc recording or control a recording in progress (see Start an Ad Hoc Recording on page 59 for details).

NOTE: In figure 39, the home page for a standard SMP 300 Series device is shown. If the Horizontal Video Mirroring LinkLicense is purchased, there will be an additional Mirroring LinkLicense tab and Horizontal Video Mirroring Status section figure 39 displaying the status of the horizontal mirroring of each input.

System Name: SMP-351-TechP21 Location: SMP-351-TechP21 6 4 1

2

5

3

Figure 39. AV Controls, Recording Controls Page

NOTE: For information on the AV Controls (see AV Controls Panel on page 55) and Recording Controls panels, aside from a basic description of the Storage Information table, see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 61 Storage Information The storage information table (see figure 40) the Stream URL panel (also available in File Management on page 89) displays the names of the available connected storage devices, their locations (internal, USB front panel port, USB rear panel port, USB RCP port), total capacity, and amount of used and available storage space. It also provides an estimate of remaining recording time for each drive and indicates (with a check mark) which drive is selected as the only or primary recording location. If the SMP is set for dual recording mode, a second check mark symbol indicates the drive selected as the secondary recording location.

NOTE: The capacity of the internal drive shown in the Total column depends on the options selected for the device. The SMP 352 has 440 Gigabytes. The SMP 351 has the options of 80 Gigabyte models and 440 Gigabyte models available for purchase. figure 40

Figure 40. Recording Controls, Storage Information Table

NOTES: • Recordings stored on the internal drive can be automatically uploaded to a network server (see Setting the Default Recording Media on page 84). • If internal storage space is nearly full and the SMP is set up to automatically upload recordings to a server, the SMP uses an automatic disc cleanup feature to make room for new recordings. As needed, the unit automatically deletes recordings previously uploaded to a server, starting with the oldest recordings, until there is enough free space on the disk. • For details on recording deletion, see Deleting Recordings in the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File. • To learn how to lock a recording to prevent it from being automatically deleted, see Locking and Unlocking a Recording Package Folder in the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 62 Scheduled Events The Scheduled Events page includes three secondary tabs, Recording Calendar, Schedule Settings on the next page, and Publish Settings on page 65, with corresponding pages that allow administrators to create scheduled recordings, publish (upload) them, and review the status of recordings.

Recording Calendar The Recording Calendar page lists the currently selected scheduling source, publishing destination, when the schedule was last synchronized, and has a file cleanup schedule. It also features two different views (calendar or list) to see all recordings (in-progress events, upcoming scheduled events, and recordings that have already taken place). figure 41

Figure 41. Recording Calendar Page The calendar displays recordings in two views: • Calendar View (see figure 41) — Access a detailed view dialog box about each specific event from this page. Also, in the event that a recording does not transfer to the designated network server or if a file needs to be uploaded again, initiate a re-upload from the detail view. • List View (see figure 42) — Recording events are listed in a table format. Recordings are listed by title, starting time, course ID, creator, identifier (file name), state, and the like. Entries can be sorted or searched in this view. figure 42

Figure 42. Recording Calendar List View Information on this page updates every 300 seconds, but can be refreshed as needed by clicking the Update Schedule button above the Active Profiles panel.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 63 Schedule Settings The Schedule Settings page within Scheduled Events allows administrators privileges to choose how to obtain presentation schedules and, if appropriate, import calendars or connect to a scheduling system (see figure 43). Scheduling must be set up using this page. It cannot be set up via the front panel. The Schedule Settings page has two panels: Active Profiles and Schedule Source Configuration, which has five sub‑pages that provide options to import calendars from sources such as an iCalendar file, a Microsoft Exchange Server schedule, and an Opencast Matterhorn Server.

NOTE: Read the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File for details and step- figure 43 by-step procedures on scheduling.

Figure 43. Schedule Settings Page

A Note on Using the SMP with an Opencast System The SMP supports HTTP ETags (entity tags), which make it possible to cache some scheduling information to minimize network traffic. When the SMP requests schedules from the Opencast server system, the Opencast server sends an ETag parameter to the SMP. Each time the SMP and server exchange schedule information, the system reads the ETag and determines whether there were any changes to scheduled events since the last synchronization. • If there have been no changes, then less scheduling data is exchanged between the SMP and the server, which reduces network traffic and the time needed for schedule updates. • If changes have been made, the server issues a new ETag, and the SMP updates the schedules.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 64 Publish Settings The Publish Settings page provides controls to specify the server destination to upload completed recordings, to configure and test protocols and settings to enable publication (uploading), and to automatically delete internal recording folders after successfully publishing the folders. This page also shares the Active Profiles panel with the figure 44 Schedule Settings page.

Figure 44. Publish Settings Page The Active Profiles panel on the Scheduled Settings page is the same as the Publish Settings page, with the exception of the Transfer Max Bitrate control. To select an Active Schedule Source, select the desired radio button for the following options: Active Schedule Source Corresponding Tab No Centralized Schedules(adhoc event only) Not applicable *default Manually import iCalendar one time Manual Calendar Import Import iCalendar data periodically Periodic Calendar Import Centralized Schedule as Microsoft server Microsoft Exchange Server Centralized Schedule as Opencast Server Opencast Server To select a publishing destination, select the desired radio button below the Active Publishing Destination for the following options: Active Publishing Destination Corresponding Tab No Centralized upload server. This is the default option. Not Applicable Ingest into Kaltura Hosted Video Platform Kaltura Ingest Ingest into Opencast Server Opencast Ingest FTP/SFTP/CIFS server Other FTP/SFTP/CIFS

NOTE: For additional information and details on how to configure settings for each publishing option, see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 65 Configuration The eight pages within the Configuration page contain the core controls needed during initial setup, for upgrading the unit, and restoring a configuration.

NOTE: Administrators can view and make changes to all settings. Those logged in as users do not have access to the Configuration tab. figure 45

Figure 45. Configuration Tab with Subtabs Using these pages, an administrator can: • Configure basic AV input settings. • Output video test patterns for setup. • Configure output stream settings and presets. • Set up AV encoding and presets. • Select or configure layouts and layout presets. • Set passwords. • Set up notices and alarms. • Select preview window settings. • Configure digital I/O ports. • Configure basic communication, identity, time, data storage, and recording location settings. • Upgrade the unit by updating firmware or installing a LinkLicense (see Extron LinkLicense on page 3). • Save configurations or restore a configuration from a saved file.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 66 Configuration Tab Features figure 46

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Figure 46. Configuration Tab and Sub-tabs The pages within Configuration include the following (see figure 46): 1 Input/Output Settings (see the following page) — Change the name for each input, select the video format for input 3, select an aspect ratio type, and enable or disable Auto‑Image, Auto Memory, HDCP authorization for each input. Configure audio for each channel (A and B). For SMP 351 models, adjustments are for audio level only. For the SMP 352 and SMP 351 models, adjustments can be made to many audio levels, filter and tone (bass and treble), and dynamic compression. Output one of several video test patterns for use during display setup, select the refresh rate for the local HDMI output, and configure the universal OSD content, size, and style. 2 Image Settings (see page 73) — Configure video input sampling and sizing, set up overscanning of SMPTE input signals, and adjust picture controls (brightness, contrast, and the like). Save or recall input and user presets. 3 Encoding & Layout — (see page 75) From the first expandable panel in this page: • Set up AV encoding • Configure the streaming method, protocol, and settings • Create encoder presets • Create streaming presets From the second panel: • Configure layouts (arrangement of windows) • Select or create layout presets • Select the background image • Configure metadata elements From the third panel: • Select metadata to associate with a recording file • Create recording profiles 4 Users and Roles (see page 80) — Set administrator and user passwords. 5 Alarms and Traps (see page 82) — Set up the e-mail server and the sender and recipient e-mail addresses for notifications within this page. Select the alarm "priority" level for each of several types of errors or conditions monitored by the unit. 6 System Settings (see page 83) — Configure settings in ten expandable panels. An administrator can configure settings for unit identity, communication, storage, and the like. Configure settings for network and serial communication, identity (unit name and network location), and date and time. Also, update firmware, add a license, and save configurations or restore a configuration from a saved file. 7 Advanced Features (see page 87) — Enable a web browser client option on the unit or upload new applications such as the Digital I/O port configuration plug-in. For more detailed information on these pages, see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 67 Input/Output Settings The three expandable panels within Input/Output Settings allow an administrator to select a number of settings for video input, test the output, and select options for audio output format and mute. This page includes audio configuration controls for each channel (A and B): • For the basic SMP 351 models, adjustments are for audio levels only. • For SMP 352 models or SMP 351 models with LinkLicense, adjustments can be made to audio levels, filter and tone (bass and treble), and dynamic compression. To open this page, click the Configuration > Input/Output Settings. figure 47

Figure 47. Input/Output Settings Sub-tab The Input/Output Settings page opens (see figure 48) figure 48

Figure 48. Input/Output Settings Page NOTE: The selected input aspect ratio setting is applied to both the archive and confidence outputs. If the confidence resolution is different, the applied aspect ratio cannot be maintained. For example, if the archive resolution is 1080p with an aspect ratio of 16:9, and the confidence display is 1024x768 with an aspect ratio of 4:3, the input aspect ratio selection cannot be maintained for both.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 68 Auto Image and Auto Memory Select the checkbox to enable Auto-Image. Auto-Image simplifies setup by executing image sizing, centering, and filtering adjustments with a single button push. Select the checkbox to enable Auto Memory. Auto Memory recalls input and image settings for signals that have previously been applied. When Auto Memory is disabled, the SMP 300 Series treats every new input as a new source. These two features can work together depending on the configuration the user chooses. See the table below for more information on the settings. Auto Memory and Auto-Image Features Auto Memory Auto-Image Information On On "New" signals or rates not previously detected by the device are initially set up using default parameters. Then, Auto-Image is automatically applied and those values are stored. The next time that signal is detected, the stored values in the auto memory location are applied. On Off "New" signals or rates not previously detected by the device are set up using default parameters. If changes are made manually to the input and picture settings, an auto memory location is created and then recalled each successive instance that the input is detected. Off On When auto memory is disabled, each change in the input sync is treated as a new signal, and Auto-Image is triggered automatically. Any changes that are made manually to the image and picture controls are lost each time a new refresh rate is detected. Off Off Each change in the input sync causes default values to be applied to the rate. Any changes that are made manually to the image and picture controls are lost when a new rate is applied.

HDMI Output Configuration Configure the preview output from this panel. figure 49

1 2 3 4

Figure 49. HDMI Output Configuration Pane 1 View the resolution of the local HDMI preview output (see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File to configure the resolution).

NOTE: The resolution of the local output follows the archive encoder resolution. When the selected archive resolution is under 720 lines (512x288, for example), the HDMI preview output is set to 1280x720, with the video content centered in the 720p window.

2 Select a refresh rate (50 Hz or 60 Hz) for the HDMI preview output. 3 Select the preview output displays when the SMP 300 is in dual channel mode. 4 Select a button to mute the audio, video, or both the audio and video.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 69 Changing the Font and Text Settings Used for the Input Switching On‑screen Display If optional fonts are uploaded to the SMP 300 Series, you can select and use one for displaying OSD text instead of the default font. Size and color can be selected for the OSD text. Optional fonts must be uploaded to the fonts folder within the SMP from the File Management page or by using an SFTP client program before selecting it in this page.

NOTES: • The SMP supports TrueType™ (.ttf) and OpenType® (.otf) fonts. • To upload a font file, use the file upload utility within theFile Management page (see File Management on page 89). • The user is responsible for obtaining necessary font licenses before uploading fonts. • After changing the font, some text may appear truncated in the OSDs because characters may be wider in the selected font than in the system default font. • The font selected here can be different from the font that is used for the metadata overlay within a recording layout (see Configuring Metadata Elements (For composite mode only) on page 78).

TIP: Many free, open source fonts are available at https://fonts.google.com/. To select a different font and change the size and color: 1. Open the Input/Output Settings page (see Input/Output Settings on page 68). 2. Expand the OSD Configuration panel (see figure 50). figure 50

Figure 50. OSD Configuration Panel 3. Navigate to the OSD section and select an available font from the Font drop‑down list (1). The selected font is immediately applied to both the input switching OSD and the universal OSD. 4. To change the size, enter a number into the Size field or click the Up and Down arrows (2) to adjust the value. The number is a percentage of the baseline font height, from 40 to 120%, with 100 being the default. 5. To change the font color, enter a six-character hexadecimal color value into the Color field (3). The default color is ffffff (white). NOTE: Consult a hex color table, if needed. Each pair of characters represents the three separate values that specify the levels of the component colors red, green, and blue, respectively. For example, red is represented by #FF0000, which is 100% red, 0% green, 0% blue.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 70 Outputting and using a video test pattern

NOTE: No input signal is needed when using a test pattern for display device setup.

The OSD Configuration panel in the Input/Output Settings page allows selection and immediate output of one of eight internally stored test patterns to the local HDMI preview output from the SMP, as well as to the recording and output stream. Video test patterns are helpful for calibrating connected displays or projectors for color, convergence, focus, resolution, contrast, and aspect ratio. Audio test options are useful for testing audio output. To select and output a test pattern: 1. Open the Input/Output Settings page. 2. Expand the OSD Configuration panel. 3. Select a pattern from the Test Patterns drop-down list. A preview of the test pattern shows above the drop-down list. Available test patterns include the following: figure 51 Color Bars Time Stamp Pulse Crop )UL $SU  

Aspect Ratio 1.33:1 Aspect Ratio 1.78:1 Aspect Ratio 1.85:1 Universal OSD

Figure 51. Test Patterns • The Pulse "test pattern" is an audio-only test. Select Pulse to output an audio pulse of 400 Hz at -10 dBu for audio output testing. • For composite mode only: • The Time Stamp pattern displays white text in a small, gray rectangle with the unit date and time (for example: Fri Apr 18 HH:MM:SS) on a black background in the top left corner of the display window. • The Universal OSD pattern consists of a small, translucent, gray rectangle with white text overlaid atop the source video content. It shows in the upper left of the screen. The text includes brief custom text followed by three selectable elements separated by commas. The options for those elements are listed in the Setting up the universal OSD test pattern section on the next page. The universal OSD pattern can be displayed together with the main AV content because it overlays the video rather than replacing it. As a result, the universal OSD pattern can be used at any time, not just during setup. It can also serve as an on screen label for presentations, in addition to metadata labels (which may or may not be displayed, depending on the screen layout) (see Encoding & Layout on page 75 for more information on metadata within screen layouts and on selecting content for the metadata fields). The selected test pattern is immediately output to the display and reflected in the preview in the AV Controls panel on the left of the screen. The test pattern displays until another pattern, or Off is selected from the Test Pattern drop-down list, or until unit power is recycled.

NOTE: When a test pattern is selected, it is overlaid atop the source AV and streamed to the display, stream, and recording. If Off is selected, the test pattern is turned off.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 71 Setting up the universal OSD test pattern To set up the universal OSD test pattern (for composite mode only): 1. Open the Input/Output Settings page. 2. Expand the OSD Configuration panel at the bottom of the page. 3. Select Universal OSD from the Test Patterns drop-down list. The fields and drop- down menus in the Universal OSD section become accessible. 4. Enter the text (up to 16 characters) into the Display Text field within the Universal OSD area. This is the first text that appears in the universal OSD, and can function as a brief title or description. 5. Select an information category from the Information 1 drop-down list, and also, if desired, from the Information 2 and Information 3 drop-down lists. figure 52

Figure 52. Universal OSD Information Selection As an example, when File destination is selected, the OSD text might be Front USB or Internal Drive Only, depending on the current system settings. The categories are identical to those used in the SIS information commands (such as 1i, 2i, 3i, and so forth). For reference, see the Command and Response Tables on page 106. If desired, select an information category from the Information 2 drop-down list and select another category from the Information 3 drop-down list. Changes are saved automatically and applied shortly after being selected. The universal OSD text appears on-screen in this format: Display Text, Information 1, Information 2, Information 3. See figure 53 on the next page for examples of how the configuration settings (on the left) translate to the universal OSD (on the right).

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 72 figure 53 REC1,CPU Usage 56% 00:10:33,20:10:51

OSD, SMP 351,1*4,up*100*full

Figure 53. Universal OSD Information Selection and Display

Disable the "No Source" OSD Select the Display "No Source" OSD to indicate no video input checkbox to remove the check mark and disable this OSD. figure 54

Figure 54. “No Source” OSD Selection When enabled, enter a number into the How many seconds should Input Switch OSD be displayed? field or use the Up and Down arrows next to the field to select a number from 0 to 300 seconds. By default, the SMP displays a "No Source" OSD when there is not an active video input.

NOTE: If Active Input in Full Screen is selected in from the When there’s no input, display drop-down in Configuration>Encoding & Layout> Layout Presets, the "No Source" OSD will not appear.

For more options, see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File.

Image Settings Use the controls within the Image Settings page within the Configuration tab to configure video input sampling and sizing, set up overscanning of SMPTE input signals, and adjust picture controls (brightness, contrast, and similar). Also save or recall input and user presets from this page.

NOTE: A user must be logged in as an administrator to see or change these settings.

To open this page, click the Configuration tab at the top of the SMP Series embedded web pages and then click the Image Settings tab on the second tier of tabs. figure 55

Figure 55. Image Settings Sub-tab

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 73 The Image Settings page opens (see figure 56). figure 56

Figure 56. Image Settings Page This page has a collapsible panel with seven sections (see figure 56): 1 Input Config — Select the input to be configured.

NOTE: You must select an input from the Input Config panel in the upper left of this page before you can adjust the image settings or save or recall presets. Selecting an input within the Image Settings page also changes the active input. 2 Picture Controls — Alter the quality of the image by changing brightness, contrast, color, and tint. 3 Signal Sampling — Configure the size, location, and aspect ratio of the currently selected input or select Auto-Image, Auto-Image & Fill, or Auto‑Image & Follow. 4 Overscan — Set the amount (0, 2.5%, or 5%) of picture enlargement applied to each video signal type for any SMPTE standard input. 5 Input Presets — Save up to 128 presets per input or recall one of those presets per input, each with a combination of signal type, signal sampling, and picture controls. 6 User Presets — Save or recall up to 16 presets of picture controls per input. 7 SDI Settings (SMP 351 3G-SDI and 352 3G-SDI only) — Set the quantization range for SDI signals from input 5. Except for the overscan settings and input preset saving and recalling, the settings on this page can also be configured using the front panel menu and controls (see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File for more information).

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 74 Selecting SDI-specific Settings For input 5 of an SMP 351 3G-SDI and SMP 352 3G-SDI you can select the quantization range, which sets the black and white level for the RGB data of the SDI input. To set the quantization: Select one of the following options from the Quantization Range drop-down list: figure 57

Figure 57. Quantization Range Drop-down List • Legal — Select this option when the YCbCr video data of the SDI source (input 5) is within the "legal" range (64-940 for luma and 64-960 for chroma). • Full — Select this option when the quantized YCbCr video data of the SDI source uses the full range of available bandwidth. NOTES: • The SDI settings are disabled for inputs 1 through 4. • Most SDI sources use the "legal" range.

Encoding & Layout The controls within the Encoding & Layout page configure signal streaming and encoding and also permit selection or configuration of video layouts. A user must be logged in as an administrator to see or change these settings. To open this page, click the Configuration > Encoding & Layout. figure 58

Figure 58. Configuration Tab, Encoding & Layout

The Encoding & Layout page opens. It features three expandable panels: • Encoding Presets — Configure audio encoding, video encoding, and streaming parameters, then create and save or recall presets of those settings. • Layout Presets — Set the size, position, and aspect ratio of video windows for both channels and save those settings as a preset or recall default or user-created preset, also set the background image and configure metadata elements. • Recording Profiles — Select metadata content to associate with an individual recording file and save it to one of 32 Recording Profiles that can be recalled for later use. NOTES: • Some of the encoder settings can also be set using the front panel menu and controls (see Picture Control Menu on page 29) or using Extron SIS commands (see the Command and Response Tables on page 106). • Layout presets are set up in this web page or via the front panel menu (see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File for additional information).

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 75 Encoding Presets Encoding presets are combinations of settings for audio and video encoding. The recording uses the highest quality signal encoding (archive encoding), and the preview (confidence view) displayed within the embedded web pages uses the lowest quality encoding (confidence encoding) of the encoding streams. • SMP 351 models support up to two encodes (archive and confidence), one recording, one local output, and live streams simultaneously. • SMP 352 models and SMP 351 models with LinkLicense support up to three encodes (archive A, archive B, and confidence), two recordings, one local output, and live streams simultaneously. NOTE: In composite mode, the video encoding resolution of the archive encoder must always be higher than or equal to that of the confidence encoder.

Any of the default encoder presets or user-created presets can be recalled and applied to a recording session (archive encoder) and stream using the embedded web pages. Presets can also be recalled using the front panel menu and controls (see Presets Menu on page 26) or SIS Commands (see the Presets on page 116). NOTE: Encoding presets must be selected prior to the start of a recording. You cannot change encoding settings during an active recording. For custom resolutions, the resolution height and width must be specified before the custom rate can be used.

The first 18 presets are factory set. Presets 1 through 9 are for popular, general AV uses with settings from 1080p High (1080p resolution at 8000 Kbps) to Confidence (515x288 at 350 Kbps). Presets 10 through 18 provide convenient settings that make it easy to integrate the SMP into an Opencast system, especially when using dual channel encoding. Some are tailored for speaker flavor, some for presentation flavor. For more information, see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File. NOTE: Some of the parameters available on this page can also be set individually using front panel controls.

An overview of encoding Each of the two encoders for the SMP 300 Series can be used for multiple purposes. The table below shows how each encoder is typically used and the differences. For details, see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File. Encoding Stream Usage Conditions or Differences Comment Archive Encoding Recording Refresh rate: 5 to 30 fps Highest quality and • One stream for SMP 351 Local HDMI output through Refresh rate: 50 or 60 Hz. resolution models and all models in the rear panel Output Does not use the compression composite encoding mode (preview) port settings specified in the archive • Two streams (channel encoder preset. This output A, channel B) for dual bypasses compression and encoding mode in encoding. SMP 352 models and Live stream via the LAN Refresh rate: 5 to 30 fps (same SMP 351 models with port and network if using a as the recording stream) LinkLicense decoder application Confidence Encoding Preview window in the AV For composite Controls panel encoding mode, Live stream via the LAN confidence encoding port and network if using a must always be decoder application the same or lower resolution than archive encoding

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 76 Streaming Presets Streaming Presets allow the user to quickly switch between various streaming options. There are 32 streaming presets that can be saved or recalled to archive and confidence. Streaming presets save the following parameters: STREAMING PRESETS Preset name Multicast IP/destination (for Multicast only) Streaming method and protocol QoS (for Push streaming only) Stream port SAP setting (for Push streaming only) MTU RTMP publish URL (for RTMP push only) TTL Destination IP/hostname RTSP Stream Name Advanced section of RTMP, such as RTMP RTSP over HTTP port (for Pull streaming port, primary and backup server URL, only) stream name, username, and password (for RTMP push only)

Audio Encoding Which input signals are combined to form the encoded audio output vary depending on audio channel selection and the status of the dual analog mono option, as detailed in the following table: Audio Encoding Channel Channel B Dual Channel Input and Output Selection Analog Mono Status Channel A Disabled Enc L = ChA L Enc R = ChA R Channel B Disabled Enc L = ChB L Enc R = ChB R ChB Dual Mono Enabled Enc L = ChB L + ChB R Enc R = ChB L + ChB R ChA + ChB Disabled Enc L = ChA L + ChB L Enc R = ChA R + ChB R ChA + ChB Dual Mono Enabled Enc L = ChA L + ChB L + ChB R Enc R = ChA R + ChB L + ChB R

NOTE: • Enc = Encoded output channel • Ch n = Input channel n • L = Left, R = Right • Dual analog mono audio is available only on input channel B. If you enable this feature, all audio input for channel B should be analog mono, though digital stereo is accepted on input 4. • Set the dual analog mono audio status in Configuration > Input/Output Settings > Input/Output Configuration. • Select the audio encoding channel in Configuration > Encoding & Layout > Encoding Presets > Channel Selection.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 77 Both left and right encoded audio signals (Enc L and Enc R) are incorporated into all the outputs (whether recordings or streams): • Archive (composite) or archive channel A and archive channel B • Confidence • Local HDMI preview output The SMP 300 Series has two independent recording options, which can be selected together or independently: • Recording Enabled — Select this checkbox to record a video as an mp4/m4v file. The drop-down list provides two video recording options: Audio + Video and Video Only. • Audio-only Recording Enabled — Select this checkbox for a recording of only the audio as an m4a file. For more audio processing information, see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File.

Layout presets (for composite mode only)

NOTES: • A user must be logged in as an administrator to see or change these settings. • Users can recall layout presets when setting up recordings. • Layout presets and metadata configuration are available only in composite encoding mode.

Layout presets define where on the screen the video windows for each input channel are located and how big each window is. Each channel (A and B) has a defined aspect ratio, size, and position. Depending on the layout arrangement, a layout can also include metadata text and some areas that let a black background or background images be visible. In the Layout Presets panel, set up some of the metadata that can appear in streams. Any of the default or user-created layout presets can be recalled and applied. Layouts apply to all streams at once: a recording session, streams, and the preview stream within the AV Controls panel (see AV Controls Panel on page 55). Presets can also be recalled using SIS commands (see Layout Presets (for composite mode only) on page 116). The first 12 presets are factory default layouts. Presets 13 through 16 are unassigned and unconfigured. All presets can be configured through the controls in the Encoding & Layout page (for additional information, see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File).

Configuring Metadata Elements (For composite mode only) Select and specify the metadata text content that is incorporated into the video and used for other purposes. Also, select the font and font color to use for that text overlay within the video.

NOTE: The metadata display and the metadata configuration controls are disabled when dual channel encoding mode is active in SMP 352 models and SMP 351 models with LinkLicense.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 78 Changing the Font Used for the Metadata Overlay If optional fonts are uploaded to the SMP, they are available to select for displaying metadata text instead of the default font.

NOTES: • The SMP supports TrueType™(.ttf) and OpenType® (.otf) fonts. • To upload a font file, use the file upload utility within theFile Management page. • The user is responsible for obtaining any necessary font licenses before uploading fonts to the SMP 300 Series. • After changing the font, some text may appear truncated in the on-screen text because characters may be wider in the selected font than in the system default font. • The font selected for the overlay can be different from the font used for both the input switching OSD and the universal OSD (see Changing the Font and Text Settings Used for the Input Switching On‑screen Display on page 70). • To select a different font color, enter the six-character hexadecimal color value. The default font color is white (ffffff). • To select a different font or font color, see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File.

TIP: Many free, open source fonts are available at https://fonts.google.com/.

Recording Profiles Recording profiles can be configured, saved, and recalled in the Recording Profiles expandable panel. Fill in the appropriate fields with the metadata text content to be associated with an individual recording file. There are 32 recording profiles that can be saved or recalled to archive and confidence files. Recording profiles save the following parameters: RECORDING PROFILE FIELDS Contributor Presenter Copyright Publisher Course Relation Coverage Source Description Subject Format Title Language Type

The SMP 300 Series lists the currently Active Profile, and the Default Profile can be selected from a drop-down list. The specified default profile is used if a user starts a recording without choosing a profile. Any recording profile can be recalled and applied before starting a recording. Recording Profiles can also be recalled, but not created, by using SIS commands (see Recording Profiles on page 122). For additional information on Recording Profiles, see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 79 Users and Roles In the Users and Roles page within Configuration, an administrator can set up both administrator and user level passwords. Passwords are not required, though they are recommended for controlling access to configuration functions. Passwords can be set up only via this page or using SIS commands (see on Remote Communication and Control on page 99). They cannot be set via the front panel.

NOTES: • An administrator password is required before a user password can be set. • If only an administrator password is set, only administrators are able to log in to the SMP 300 Series web pages. Users have no access. • To allow user access to a password-protected unit, set both an administrator password and a user password, and users must log in using the user password.

To open this page, click the Configuration tab at the top of the SMP 300 Series embedded web pages and then click the Users and Roles tab on the second tier of tabs. figure 59

Figure 59. Configuration Tab, Users and Roles Sub-tab

The Users and Roles page opens, showing the Password pane (see figure 60). figure 60

Figure 60. Password Panel

Setting passwords If no passwords are set, anyone who opens the internal web pages is connected with administrator-level access and can make changes to all settings. To limit access and prevent changes to system configuration, the following options are available: • Set an administrator level password only — This option allows only administrators to access the SMP 300 Series web pages. End users cannot log in to use the web pages. • Set both an administrator level password and a user level password — This allows administrators to log in and manage all aspects of the SMP 300 Series. Users can log in to use just the AV Controls panel and the Recording Controls page.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 80 figure 61

3 1 2 6

4 5

Figure 61. Password Panel To set passwords: 1. Enter a desired password, at least four characters long, into the Administrator Password field (see figure 61, 1) in the Login ID: admin panel. • Passwords must consist of any readable characters, up to 128 characters. • Passwords cannot contain a single space or the "pipe" ( | ) character. • Passwords are case-sensitive. 2. Enter the same password into the Confirm Password field (2) directly below the Administrator Password field. Once a password is entered, the fields in the Login ID: user section are accessible. 3. If no user password is set, click Save (3) in the upper right of the Password panel. To set a user password, complete steps 4 through 6. 4. To set a user level password, type a desired password into the User Password field (4) in the Login ID: user panel. 5. Type the same password into the Confirm Password field (5) directly below the User Password field. 6. Click Save (3). Both the administrator and user passwords are saved. Clearing Passwords To remove (clear) a password, click Clear (6) corresponding to the administrator or user password and click Save (3) to remove. NOTE: When the administrator password is cleared, the user password is also cleared.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 81 Alarms and Traps In the Alarms and Traps page within Configuration, an administrator can configure e-mail account and communication settings to allow the unit to send notification e-mails. This is also the location for selecting whether to log, display a message about, or send an email about various conditions and errors experienced by the SMP 300 Series. To open this page, click the Configuration tab (see figure 62) at the top of the SMP embedded web pages and click the Alarms and Traps tab on the second tier of tabs. figure 62

Figure 62. Configuration Tab, Alarms and Traps Subtab The Alarms and Traps page opens, showing the two panels (see figure 63). figure 63

Figure 63. Alarms and Traps Page 1 Alarm Notifier Destinations — Enter email sender and receiver information for alarm notifications (see the Alarm table on page 48 for more information on the alarms.). 2 Alarm Message List — Choose the priority for a given alarm on the SMP, or disable the alarm. The options for an alarm are: • Notify — The SMP sends an email and unsolicited SIS response. • Display — The indicate alarm LED is active on the front panel, AAP or wallplate, and web page. The event is also logged. • Log — The SMP records the alarm in the events log only. • Disabled — The alarm is disabled.

NOTES: • If internal storage space is nearly full (at the point when the disk space alarm is triggered) and the SMP 300 Series is set up to automatically upload recordings to a server (see Publish Settings on page 65), then the SMP uses an automatic disc cleanup feature to make room for new recordings. As needed, the unit automatically deletes previous recordings that have been uploaded to a server, starting with the oldest recordings, until there is enough free space on the disk. • All active alarms can be manually cleared by an administrator via the web page.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 82 System Settings Controls within eight of the twelve panels in the System Settings page are essential during initial setup of the unit. The four other panels contain features that are used infrequently for updating the unit, restoring a configuration, or limiting access to front panel controls. NOTE: A user must be logged in as an administrator to see or change these settings. figure 64

Figure 64. System Settings Panels The panels are: 1 Unit Identification — Set the system (unit) name and a description for its location. This is also the location of the model name and description, part number, firmware version, overall unit temperature, part number, serial number, and license information. 2 Date and Time — Set the date, time, time zone, and settings for syncing with one or more NTP (network time protocol) servers. 3 Networking — Set the IP addresses for the unit, gateway, and DNS server, as well as the subnet mask and port numbers for a variety of port types, or enable or disable SNMP. 4 Recording Media Selection — Set recording parameters, such as destination, destination priority, and secondary recording mode. 5 Recording Limits — Set recording file size and duration limits for ad hoc recordings. 6 Default Recording File Names — Choose what type of information is used to compose names of recordings and what type of file extension (m4a, m4v, and mp4). 7 Marks and Thumbnails — Choose whether to have the SMP produce normal (small) size thumbnail images of the recorded video or thumbnail images the same size (resolution) as the archive encoder settings. 8 Serial — Set the baud rate and protocol for the rear panel remote control serial port. 9 Firmware and License Loader — Initiate firmware uploads and enter LinkLicense information (see Extron LinkLicense on page 3). NOTE: All streaming configurations go back to default when firmware is updated. ¢ Backup and Restore — Back up current SMP or IP configuration settings, or restore a previously saved configuration file. £ Executive Mode — Enable or disable various levels of front panel lock-out to limit access to the controls and functions of the SMP. ¤ SSL Certificate — Import user supplied SSL certificates. Many of the system setup tasks must be performed within these pages (see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File). However, some of the settings can also be set using the front panel controls or Extron SIS commands.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 83 Setting the Default Recording Media To choose where a recording is saved during its creation: NOTE: Secondary storage mode is not available and cannot be selected if dual channel encoding mode is active.

1. In the System Settings page, click the Recording Media Selection panel bar. figure 65

Figure 65. Recording Media Selection Panel 2. Use the drop-down lists in Set Recording Destination Priority (see figure 65, 1) to designate where the SMP stores a recording when Auto is selected as the recording destination or a recording destination is unavailable. The default destination priority is: RCP USB, Front USB, Rear USB, Internal. 3. An Admin can disable one or more Record Destinations to prevent a user from recording to that location by deselecting the checkbox or checkboxes. For example, if the Front USB is deselected, the SMP does not recognize a USB drive inserted into the Front USB port, and the recording file is not saved to this Record Destination. To save recordings to a single location (to use single storage mode): a. Verify that the Secondary Recording Enabled checkbox (2) is disabled (unchecked). b. Select the checkbox or checkboxes in the Record Destination panel (3) to enable recording destinations. • Internal — This forces the unit to store recordings only in its internal storage, even if USB drives are attached to the front and rear panel ports. • Front USB, Rear USB, or RCP USB — These options force the unit to record to a USB drive connected to the corresponding port. NOTES: • At least one record location must be enabled as a record destination. • The Internal recording destination must be enabled for file publishing. • The SMP automatically uploads recording files to a network server only if files are recorded to and stored on theinternal drive. If only a USB option is selected, files cannot be auto-uploaded to a server. • When a record destination is disabled, the SMP will not report a USB flash drive attached to a port. • The RCP USB location is grayed out if an RCP 101 is not detected. • All locations are enabled by default. Select the checkbox to deselect.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 84 4. To save recordings to two locations at once (dual recording mode):

NOTE: Secondary storage mode is not available and cannot be selected if dual channel encoding mode is active.

a. Select (check) the Secondary Recording Enabled checkbox (see figure 66, 1). figure 66

Figure 66. Recording Media Selection - Enable Dual Recording • The selection in the Recording Destination: field changes to Internal Drive (2). This cannot be changed in dual recording mode. The recording is always stored to the internal drive. • The Secondary Recording Destination: drop-down list is enabled (3). b. Select an option (Auto, Front USB, Rear USB, or RCP USB) from the Secondary Recording Destination: drop-down list. • This designates which storage drive (if one is connected at that location and it has been enabled in the Record Destination pane) is used to store a second copy of the recording. • If Auto is selected, the secondary recording destination is based upon the selections made in step 2 on the previous page. Ensure Internal and the desired secondary recording destination are enabled (see figure 65, 3 on the previous page). 5. Optionally, limit users to the storage drive location selected in step 2 or the Secondary Recording Destination specified in step 4 (without the ability to change locations). To do so, select (check) the Record Destination Limiter checkbox (4).

NOTE: If the Record Destination Limiter checkbox is selected and the setting has been saved by clicking the Save button within the Recording Media Selection panel, destination settings cannot be changed and secondary storage mode cannot be enabled or disabled until the Record Destination Limiter is disabled and that change is saved. Once the Record Destination Limiter has been disabled, make changes to the other settings and save the changes.

Setting the Recording File Limits Recording files can be limited (portions of long recordings) to a specific size. If this feature is enabled (default), each time a recording file reaches the specified size, the file is saved and the SMP creates a new file (up to the specified size) for the next portion of the recording, and so on until the recording event ends or the SMP runs out of storage space.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 85 To set a recording file size limit: 1. In the System Settings page, click the Recording Limits panel bar. figure 67

Figure 67. Limit Recording Size 2. Select (check) the Recording File Size Limiter checkbox (see figure 67, 1). 3. Enter a number into the Maximum File Size field or use the Up and Down arrows (2) next to the field to select a number. The file size can be limited to any size between 100 MB to 3800 MB (3.8 GB). • The default is 3584 MB. • If the Recording File Size Limiter checkbox is deselected, the size limit function is disabled, and the entire recording is stored in a single file. 4. Click Save, or Cancel (3) to discard the changes. NOTE: For an SMP set for secondary storage mode with unlimited file size selected, the recording saved on the internal storage drive is saved in a single file. However, if the recording is saved to a USB storage device with FAT32 formatting, recording creates multiple 4 GB files as a result of the FAT32 size limit. Use a USB drive formatted for NTFS in order to avoid the file size limit.

Ad hoc recordings can be limited to a specific duration. If this feature is enabled, the SMP stops recording an event after the specified number of hours. To limit the ad hoc recording duration: 1. In the System Settings page, click the Recording Limits panel bar. figure 68

Figure 68. Limit Ad Hoc Recording Duration 2. Select (check) the limit Recording Ad hoc Duration Limiter checkbox (see figure 68, 1). 3. Enter a number into the Maximum Ad hoc Record Duration field or use the Up and Down arrows (2) next to the field to select a number from 0 to 24 hours. • By default, the Recording Ad hoc Duration Limiter checkbox is not checked and there is no limit on duration. • Enter time in full hours only. Fractions of an hour are not saved. 4. Click Save, or click Cancel (3) to discard the changes.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 86 Advanced Features In the Advanced Features page within the Configuration page, an administrator can do the following: • Set the SMP to run a web browser client application for direct control on site for limited network (IP) configuration when a network-connected computer is not available. • Upload a FlexOS plugin application to add functions and configuration options, then use the plugin to configure features of the SMP. NOTE: These settings cannot be set via the front panel.

To open this page, click Configuration > Advanced Features. figure 69

Figure 69. Configuration tab, Advanced Features Sub-tab The Advanced Features page opens to the Browser Client and FlexOS Apps panels. figure 70

1

Figure 70. Advanced Features Page

Using an Internal Browser Client, a Keyboard and Mouse to Control the SMP 300 Series Configure the SMP to run a web browser client application for direct control, if a stand‑alone computer is not available on site. If enabled, the internal browser provides access to a subset of the Network (IP) Settings configuration pane. To set up the SMP for local control using its internal browser client: 1. On a computer connected to the same network as the SMP, open a browser, enter the IP address of the unit into the address field, and connect to the embedded web pages. 2. Click the Configuration tab at the top of the SMP 300 Series embedded web pages and then click the Advanced Features tab on the second tier of tabs. 3. Select the Enable the browser client? checkbox (see figure 70,1) in the Browser Client panel. NOTE: The following steps do not require a computer and do not require the SMP to be connected to a network.

4. Connect a monitor, keyboard, and mouse directly to the SMP 300 Series (see Control System and External Device Connections on page 15). • Connect the keyboard to one of the rear panel Mouse/Keyboard USB connectors. • Connect the mouse to the other rear panel Mouse/Keyboard USB connectors. • Connect a display to the local HDMI Preview Out port on the rear panel.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 87 5. By default, the local output shows the preview (confidence) image on the connected monitor or display. To switch between viewing the preview and viewing the embedded web pages, press the keys on the keyboard connected to the SMP 300 Series.

NOTE: The default web page allows configuration of the network settings.

6. Use the mouse and keyboard to navigate through the pages and panels to make changes as needed. 7. When all the changes have been completed, press the keys on the keyboard to switch back from the browser client to the preview display.

Uploading a FlexOS Application to the SMP 300 Series Occasionally Extron develops supplemental applications or plug-ins to enhance or add functions or control options to the product. For example, download a plug-in application to use the embedded web pages to configure and monitor the rear panel digital I/O ports. The controls in the Advanced Features page upload the application (app) to the SMP (see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File). figure 71

Figure 71. FlexOS Apps Panel

NOTES: • You may need to log in to the Extron website using your Extron Insider account information in order to download the software. • Contact your Extron representative if you need a login ID.

Available applications Digital I/O configuration — The digital I/O configuration (Digital I/O) application is included with the SMP 300 Series. Use it to rename each digital input/output port, set its use mode (input or output, with or without pull-up), create labels for on and off states, and see the status of each port. Additionally, link monitored conditions, such as the state of a particular I/O port, a specific recording mode, or mute state or alarm with actions with this application. These actions include changing an input, recording mode, or mute mode, or swapping channels or setting a chapter marker. For further information, see FlexOS Applications on page 98. Additional applications may become available in the future for download from the Extron website.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 88 File Management The File Management page contains a directory of files stored in the SMP 300 Series and any connected shared drives on the network, which can be deleted, renamed or locked. It also contains a file upload utility to add new files to the SMP for use as background images. Use this page to connect the SMP to shared network drives and upload or download files from the SMP through an SFTP client. Only users logged in to the SMP 300 Series with administrator privileges have access to the File Management page and can make changes. To open this page, click the File Management tab: figure 72

Figure 72. File Management Tab The File Management page opens to the File Directory (see figure 73,1), File Upload Utility (2), Accessing Internal Filesystem (3) panes, and the storage information table (4): figure 73

Figure 73. Configuration, File Management Tab The storage information table (also on the Recording Controls page) lists the names of the available connected storage devices, their locations (internal, USB front panel port, USB rear panel port), total capacity, and amount of used and available storage space. It also provides an estimate of remaining recording time for each drive. figure 74

Figure 74. Storage Information Table This list can be sorted. Click on any of the table headings or click the arrow that appears when you mouse over a table heading and select a sort order from the drop-down list.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 89 NOTES: • Recordings stored on the internal drive can be automatically uploaded to a network server (configured inConfiguration > Schedule Settings > Publish Settings). If internal storage space is nearly full, the SMP uses a disc cleanup feature to make room for new recordings. As needed, the unit automatically deletes old recordings that have already been uploaded to a server, starting with the oldest recordings, until there is enough free space on the disk. The unit removes recordings that have not been published if additional free space is needed. • The recording time estimate for the internal drive considers space that can be made available from recordings that are eligible for automatic deletion. At times, the total listed space may not equal the total calculated space (used + available + system). • The total space listed for the internal drive may be larger than the sum of used space plus available space because the total includes space reserved for system files. • The available space might be larger than the difference between the total and used space because used space includes deletable recordings. • For detailed information on disk space and storage, see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File.

Add a Network Share Network servers or network-attached storage drives (network shares) can be added to the file list so the SMP 300 Series can access files and folders stored on shared network resources. These shares can store background images.

NOTE: The size of network shares is initially unknown and there can be significant performance issues if the entire contents of every network share is indexed on every filter or search request. To provide the best performance with available resources, the searches and filtering for network shares is limited to the layer immediately below the level that the user manually expands. If the user fully expands the share, then it is fully indexed, searched, and filtered (see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File to add a network share).

Upload and Download Files Using an SFTP Client

NOTE: Recordings can be downloaded from the SFTP client but recordings cannot be deleted from the client.

Automatic file uploading to a network location (see Setting the Default Recording Media on page 84), the recording re‑transfer (re-upload) option within the Scheduled Events page, and the upload option on the File Management page for uploading background image files to the unit satisfy most file transfer needs. However, if there is a need to transfer files into or out of the SMP outside of those controls, use an SFTP client utility. To use an SFTP client utility to transfer files: 1. Click the File Management tab. 2. Copy the URL from the Accessing Internal Filesystem pane. The URL includes the SFTP protocol name (sftp), the address of the SMP, and the logical port number (usually 22022) of the LAN port. For example, sftp://192.168.194.28:22022. 3. Open an SFTP client program of your choice. 4. Paste the URL from the SMP 300 Series into the host name or host address field of the SFTP client program. If necessary, delete sftp from the URL and select SFTP from a different field or menu, and remove the port number from the URL and paste it into a port number field.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 90 5. If an administrator username and password are set for the unit, enter those in the appropriate fields in the SFTP client. 6. Log into or connect to the SMP. 7. Use the SFTP client software to copy files (recordings, logs, background images) to and from the internal storage folders on the SMP. 8. Disconnect from the SMP (close the SFTP session).

Troubleshooting The five pages within the Troubleshooting page contain controls typically used during initial setup to test connections, and then later if product support issues arise. A logged in administrator can: • View current system conditions and connections. • View event logs and alarms. • Test network connections. • Reset the unit.

NOTE: Only administrators have access to the Troubleshooting tab and can see and make changes to all settings.

Features of the Troubleshooting Page figure 75

System Name: SMP-351-TechP21 Location:1 2 SMP-351-3TechP21 4 5

Figure 75. Troubleshooting Tab The pages within Troubleshooting are: 1 Status (see the next page) — Displays information about the firmware and web page versions, system and component temperatures, fan speeds, Ethernet connection, MAC address, date and time, as well as details about the bit rates for audio and both the archive and confidence encoding streams. 2 Logs (see page 93) — Displays a list (log) of alerts and notices for any event set up for any status other than Disabled in Configuration > Alarms and Traps > Alarm Message List. The log can be sorted by date and time, severity, DB ID, or message. It can also be filtered, or exported to a CSV file. 3 Alarms (see page 94) — Similar to Logs, this page displays a list of the more severe events that trigger alarms. The list can be sorted, filtered, or exported to a CSV file. Individual alarms can be cleared. Only active and recently active alarms are displayed. 4 Diagnostic Tools (see page 95) — Test network connections using a ping utility, a route (tracert) function, or Nmap test. Also, run other diagnostic tests that generate a debugging log. 5 System Resets (see page 96) — Initiate a unit reboot, delete all stored content and format the internal storage, or perform one of five different types of reset.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 91 Status The Status page within the Troubleshooting page displays factory-defined and user‑defined information about the unit. This page contains the unit name, part number, firmware version, MAC address, location description, and related information about the unit. It also displays the current audio bit rate and the video bit rates for all encoding streams. Some of the information in this page can also be found using SIS commands (see Command and Response Tables starting on page 106) or the front panel (see Status Menu on page 46). To open this page, click the Troubleshooting tab at the top of the SMP 300 Series embedded web pages and then click the Status tab on the second tier of tabs (see figure 76). figure 76

Figure 76. Troubleshooting Tab, Status Sub-tab The Status page opens, showing the Detailed System Status and Encoder Status panels (see figure 77). figure 77

Figure 77. Status Page All of the items on this page are read-only except: • The hyperlink to the Extron website Find new firmware on Extron.com (see figure 77, 1) where updated firmware for the unit is located. • The Date & Time Sync button (2) commands the unit to sync its internal clock time and date with the settings from an NTP server.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 92 Logs The Logs page within Troubleshooting displays a list (log) of alerts and notices for any event set up for a status other than Disabled in the Configuration > Alarms and Traps > Alarm Message panel. All log entries are read-only. The logs can be sorted, filtered, searched, or exported to a comma-separated values (CSV) file. To open this page, click the Troubleshooting tab at the top of the embedded web pages, then click the Logs tab on the second tier of tabs (see figure 78). figure 78

Figure 78. Troubleshooting Tab, Logs Sub-tab The Logs page opens, showing filtering controls and the log list (see figure 79). figure 79

Figure 79. Logs Page For further information, see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 93 Alarms The Alarms tab within Troubleshooting displays a list of alerts for events as determined in Configuration > Alarms and Traps > Alarm Message List. Alarm list entries are read‑only. The alarm list can be sorted, filtered, searched, or exported to a comma‑separated values (CSV) file. To open this page, click the Troubleshooting tab at the top of the SMP 300 Series embedded web pages, then click the Alarms tab on the second tier of tabs (see figure 80). figure 80

Figure 80. Troubleshooting, Alarms Sub-tab The Alarms page opens, showing filtering controls and the alarm history list (see figure 81). figure 81

Figure 81. Alarms Page, Alarm History Panel • Active, unresolved alarms are displayed as red text. • To clear or remove an alarm, select the row it is listed in and click Clear Selected Alarm(s). • To mute an alarm, so that it does not appear in the alarm list again the next time it is triggered, select the checkbox for that alarm in the Muted column. For further information about the Alarms page, see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 94 Diagnostic Tools The Diagnostic Tools page within Troubleshooting provides a convenient way to test network connections using a ping utility, a trace route (tracert) function, and an Nmap network discovery tool. Also, generate a log file to send to Extron support staff to aid in troubleshooting problems with the unit or the system. To open this page, click the Troubleshooting tab at the top of the embedded web pages and then click the Diagnostic Tools tab on the second tier of tabs (see figure 82). figure 82

Figure 82. Troubleshooting Tab, Diagnostic Tools Sub-tab The Diagnostic Tools page opens (see figure 83). figure 83

Figure 83. Diagnostic Tools For further information about the Diagnostic Tools page, see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 95 System Resets The System Resets page within Troubleshooting contains options to initiate a unit reboot, delete all stored content and format the internal storage, or perform one of five different types of reset. Some of the reset options offered here can also be performed using SIS commands or the front panel menu. To open this page, click the Troubleshooting tab at the top of the embedded web pages and then click the System Resets tab on the second tier of tabs (see figure 84). figure 84

Figure 84. Troubleshooting Tab, System Resets Sub-tab The System Resets page opens to the Reset panel (see figure 85). figure 85

Figure 85. System Resets Page

Each option within this page includes a description of its function. To perform a reboot, reset, or content deletion (storage reformatting), click the button for the desired option. When a reset or reboot is performed, the unit reboots and loses its network connection. • After a reset or reboot, it may take a few minutes for the SMP to restart and connect to the network. Refresh the browser window to reconnect to the unit. • When you select Reset IP Networking Settings or Factory Reset, all IP addresses and network settings are reset to factory defaults. You must connect again using the default addresses. For information about the system resets, see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 96 Mirroring LinkLicense If the SMP has been upgraded with the Horizontal Video Mirroring LinkLicense, the web‑UI will have a Mirroring LinkLicense tab. The Mirror LinkLicense page has two panels: Recording Settings, and Horizontal Video Mirroring Settings that are used to configure the SMP for one button recording. To open this page, click the Mirroring LinkLicense tab at the top of the embedded web pages (see figure 86). figure 86

Figure 86. Mirroring LinkLicense Tab The Mirroring LinkLicense page opens with two expandable panels (see figure 87). figure 87

Figure 87. Mirror LinkLicense Page The panels in the Mirror LinkLicense page are: 1 Recording Settings — Set the delay time to start recording after the record command has been issued (default is 5 seconds), and set the minimum recording time on a recording destination (default is 5 minutes). 2 Horizontal Video Mirroring Settings — Enable Horizontal Video Mirroring for one or more inputs. This feature shows the video or stream as a reflected image on the central vertical axis, as the SMP flips the video horizontally, to allow the notes to be displayed correctly, if the presenter is standing behind a glass marker board, facing the camera to address the audience while writing notes on the board. For detailed information on configuring the Mirroring LinkLicense page settings, see the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File.

SMP 300 Series • Web-Based User Interface 97 FlexOS Applications

This section provides basic instructions on how to use each supplemental plug-in application (app) available for the SMP 300 Series. When an app is downloaded and installed, a user must have administrator privileges to access the Advanced Features page and to use the applications. The apps are available on the SMP 300 Series product page at www.extron.com.

About the FlexOS App - Digital I/O Configurator This application allows the user to first configure and label the digital input/output (I/O) ports and then create up to 16 different monitors that check for conditions and apply actions when the conditions are met. figure 88

Figure 88. Configure Digital I/O Dialog Box Full instructions for loading and using FlexOS Applications in the web-based user interface, are available in the SMP 300 Series Embedded Web Pages Help File.

NOTE: Pull-up resistors are often used with buttons and switches that are wired as contact closures to ground. With a pull-up resistor, the input pin reads a high state when the button is not pressed (the circuit is open). When the button is pressed, it connects the input pin directly to ground, and the input pin reads a low state.

TIPS: Here are some guidelines on when to select one of the pull-up modes. • Input with pull-up — Enable the pull-up resistor if the external device does not have the capability or is not configured to drive the SMP digital input above the minimum logic high threshold (such as when connected to a switch contact closure to ground, or when a digital output drives an open collector or drain). • Output with pull-up — Enable the pull-up resistor if the load requires that a logic high signal be driven from the source (the SMP) (when the load does not have its own internal pull-up resistor, for example). Pull-ups do not need to be used when driving loads that require only contact closure to ground (when controlling an Extron IPL T PC1, for example).

SMP 300 Series • Flex I/O Applications 98 Remote Communication and Control

This section describes Simple Instruction Set (SIS) command programming and control of the SMP 300 Series, including: • Connection Options • Host-to-device Communications • Using the Command and Response Tables • Command and Response Tables

Connection Options The SMP 300 Series can be configured and controlled using SIS commands or embedded web pages. Configure and control the SMP 300 Series remotely via a host computer or other device (such as a control system) by connecting to the rear panel RS‑232 port, LAN port, or the front panel USB Config port of the SMP device.

RS-232 Port The SMP 300 Series has a rear panel serial port (see figure 4, E on page 14) that can be connected to a host device such as a computer running a HyperTerminal utility, or the Extron DataViewer utility. The port makes serial control of the SMP possible. Use the protocol information listed below to make the connection Host-to-device Communications on page 101. RS-232 protocol defaults: • 9600 baud • no parity • 1 stop bit • 8 data bits • no flow control

Front Panel Configuration Port The mini B USB port is located on the front panel (see figure 8, B on page 20). Connect to a host computer for configuration using SIS commands with DataViewer, available at www.extron.com. To connect the SMP 300 Series to a host computer, download the USB driver, follow the on-screen instructions, and configure the SMP as required. NOTE: If an Extron USB device has never been connected to the host computer, prior to connecting the SMP 300 Series config (USB) port for the first time, you must install and activate the USB driver. The simplest way to do this is to install Dataviewer (see DataViewer on page 130).

SMP 300 Series • Remote Communication and Control 99 figure 89

Ethernet (LAN)Port The rear panelLANconnector (see 3. 2. 1. To establishanetworkconnectiontotheSMP: • • must beproperly terminatedforyourapplication. cablecanbeterminatedasastraight-throughThe Ethernet cableoracrossover cableand Ethernet Connection Gateway IPaddress: Subnet mask: SMP 300 SeriesIPaddress: DHCP: LAN portdefaults: of thedevicepossibleusingacontrol systemorPCconnectedtothesameLANWAN. necessary, viaSISorusingtheSMP 300SerieswebUI.Thisconnectionmakescontrol system orPCisviaTelnet (aTCPsocketusingport23).TheTelnet portcanbechanged,if LANorWAN.connected toanEthernet Communicationbetweenthedeviceandcontrol Insert T b. a. password. If thedeviceispassword protected, entertheappropriate administratororuser b. a. firmware version,partnumber, andthecurrent dateandtime. The SMPresponds withacopyrightmessageincludingthenameofproduct, Open aTCPsockettoport23usingtheSMP300SeriesIPaddress. Patch (straight)cable Crossover cable Figure 89. Connector N 12345678 Pair Wir RJ-45 OTE: Pins: If thepassword is notaccepted,the Administrator If thepassword is accepted,thedeviceresponds with copyright message.Proceed tostep3. If theSMPispassword-protected, a immediately afteritsendsthecopyrightmessage. If theSMPisnotpassword-protected, thedeviceisready toacceptSIScommands factory‑specified default, wisted es

If thelocalsystemadministratorshavenotchangedvalue, RJ-45 Ethernet ConnectorPinAssignments RJ-45 Ethernet re end andT568Battheother(TxRxpairs A cablethatiswir

Pin versed) isa"cr 1 2 3 4 5 7 6 8 —Direct connectionbetweenthecomputerandSMP. (for dir End 1 Wir white-orange orange white-gr blue white-blue white-br gr br T568B . een own e Color Cr — Connection of the SMP to an Ethernet LAN. —ConnectionoftheSMPtoanEthernet ect connectiontoaPC) ossover Cable ossover" cable. een own ed asTIA/EIAT568Aatone 0 255 192 off SMP 300Series •RemoteCommunication andControl . 0 192 . Pin . . 0 1 2 3 4 6 5 7 8 figure 4 255 168 . 0 . 168 Wir white-gr gr white-orange blue orange white-blue white-br br End 2 T568A . . 0 254 een own . e Color 0 . 254 . , een own 254 Password Q password . 254 on assignments ar a "straight-thr A cablewir

, isthecorrect valueforthisfield. Pin (for connectiontoaswitch,hub,orr 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 page 14 prompt reappears. Straight-thr End 1 prompt appearsbelowthe br white-br gr white-blue blue white-gr orange white-orange Wir T568B een own ed thesameatbothendsiscalled e Color ough" cablebecausenopin/pair e swapped. ) onthedevicecanbe een own Login ough Cable Pin 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

User br white-br gr white-blue blue white-gr orange white-orange Wir End 2 T568B een own e Color or outer) een own Login

100

Host-to-device Communications SMP 300 Series-initiatedMessages V Day, 60–1634-12 ] or Day, Connection Timeouts ] or Day, 60– ] or D ] from thehost.TheSMP 300Seriesinitiatedmessagesare listedhere. The SMP 300Seriesinitiatesmessagesunderspecificconditions.Noresponse isrequired the response characterstring.Astringisoneormore characters. command endswithacarriagereturn andalinefeed(CR/LF= special characterstobeginorendthecommandsequence.Eachresponse toan SIS SIS commands panel changesare alsosenttouserswhoare inverbosemode. Telnet socketreports changesinmessagesthatresemble SIScommandresponses. Front notices, theTelnet sessionmustbeinverbosemode1or3.In3,the from otherTelnet socketsorserialportchanges.ForaTelnet sessiontoreceive change Telnet connectionscanbeusedtomonitorforchangesthatoccur, suchasSIScommands Verbose Mode default, thistimeoutvalueis5minutes,butthecanbechanged. linktimesoutafteradesignatedperiodoftimewithnocommunication.By The Ethernet NOTE: NOTE: ay, n.nn © Copyright © Copyright © © 1324-02

responses, forexample,standard is must besent. periods, disconnectthesocketandreopen theconnectionwhenanothercommand issuing theQuery( Copyright Copyright

DD DD DD DD isthefirmware versionnumber.

MMM MMM MMM MMM SSH connectionsmayaddanextracarriagereturn inthe finalterminatorSIS Extron recommends leavingthedefaulttimeoutat5minutesandperiodically

]

] YYYY HH:MM:SS YYYY HH:MM:SS YYYY YYYY

consist ofoneormore characterspercommand field.Theydonotrequire

2014-2017, 2014-2017, 2014-2017, 2014-2017,

HH:MM:SS HH: MM:SS Q ) commandtokeeptheconnectionactive.Ifthere are longidle ] ]

] ] Extron Extron Extron Extron SMP 300Series •RemoteCommunication andControl

Electronics, Electronics, Electronics, Electronics, X1!] andSSHis

SMP SMP SMP 3513G‑SDI, SMP 351,

352 352, X1!}]

3G-SDI, ]

Vn.nn

Vn.nn ), whichsignalstheendof . , ,

Vn.nn 60–1634-11

60– Vn.nn 1324-01 , ,

] ] 101

figure 90

Using theCommandandResponseTables Error Responses Password Information • The SMP sendsthecopyrightmessagesunderfollowingcircumstances: Figure 90. Space conversion tablebelowisforusewiththecommandandresponse table. are shownthroughout thetable.TheSIScommandsare notcasesensitive.TheASCIItoHex represent variablesinthecommandandresponse fields.Commandandresponse examples The The error response codesandtheirdescriptionsare asfollows: When theSMPisunabletoexecutecommand,itreturns anerror response tothehost. administrator anduser, theunitdefaultstoadministratorprivileges. ] If thecorrect password isentered, theunitresponds with carriage return. Theprompt isrepeated ifthecorrect password isnotentered. The • E10 E17 E14 E13 E12 Login User If theSMPisoff andanRS-232connectionisalready setup(thePCiscabledto message, date,andtimemaybefollowedbyapassword prompt. connected viaTelnet, butnotviaRS-232.IfusingaTelnet connection,thecopyright SMP is firstopened.Thedayoftheweek,date,andtimeare shownwhentheSMPis If theSMP ison,itsendscopyrightmessageswhenaTelnet connectiontothe connected unitsendsthesemessagesviaRS-232whenfirstpowered on. the SMPandaserialcommunicationprogram suchasHyperTerminal isopen),the Command andResponseTables ]

– – – – – Password: Invalid commandforsignaltype Not validforthisconfiguration Invalid parameter(numberisoutofrange) Invalid portnumber Unrecognized command ASCII toHe ASCII toHexConversion ] , dependingonthepassword entered. Ifpasswords are thesameforboth prompt requires apassword (administratorleveloruserlevel)followedbya x Con ver sion SMP 300Series •RemoteCommunication andControl Ta bl e beginson • page 106 E28 E26 E24 E22 E18

– – – – – ] oi Administrator Login Bad filenameornotfound Maximum connectionsexceeded Privilege violation Busy System timedout . Symbolsusedinthetable ] or 102

Symbol definitions or X1# X1% X1& X2! X2) X1( X1* X1^ X1$ X1@ X1! X1) E or } X( X* X! ] W • |

======to (GMT)offsetGreenwich value: MeanTime zoneacronym (2to6letters) Time Day, date,and time( hostnamestandards.Must complywithinternet Device name(63characters,max) Firmware versionnumber Inputs 1to4(15forSDImodels) Escape Space or pipesymbol(nolinefeed,hex Carriage return CR/LF (carriagereturn/line feed) leading zeros. capital The parameteriscasesensitive, andmustuse delimiter is D max = prior toparameter: max = receive orDelimitervalue. Parameter toseteitherLengthofmessage have bothvalues= zeros. Commandsusingboth 2 terminating (min= characters comingintoaserialportbefore intensofmilliseconds towaitbetween Time response isreturned withleading zeros. 0 coming intoaserialportbefore terminating (min= intensofmillisecondstowaitforcharacters Time ( Hardware MACaddress Default: Subnet mask Default DNSserverIPaddress: Default gatewayIPaddress: Default: ( IP address indotteddecimalnotation offset from GMTincludingthetimezonename. 00-05-A6- xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx 2 0 Configuration type 1 0 1 0 Status =DecimalvalueforASCIIcharacter(min = , max= =Boxspecificparameters(box.cfg) =Enabled/assigned/on/muted =Live =IPConfig(ip.cfg) = = 14:00 20 Offline Disabled/unassigned/off/unmuted (default) ms).Theresponse isreturned withleading 32767 00255

D 255.255.0.0 192.168.254.254 orcapital . Represents hoursandminutes ( 32767 10D

NN-NN-NN

, default= , default= ) .

and,default=

0

L 3 0 , max= . Theresponse isreturned with Day bytelength= orbothsettonon‑zero.

(nopadding) ) ,• 0L 00000L

L MM =#=byte count(min= 32767 0.0.0.0 = (nopadding)

• X1& 0 DD 0.0.0.0 10 bytecount). 0 ). Value isplaced and

D) • = 3L , anddefault= YY 100

andASCII ‑

X2) HH ms).The

-12:00 :

HH MM must

0 : , MM :

SS 0A 0 ) )

,

SMP 300Series •RemoteCommunication andControl X3# X2# X4# X2& X2% X4& X4% X3) X2* X2^ X2@ X4$ X4@ X4! X4) X4^ ======Password —Maximumlength 128characters.All 2 1 0 Audio format RS-232 stopbits— RS-232 databits— O RS-232 parity—singleletter: 57600 RS-232 baudrate( 3 2 1 0 Verbose mode parameters instead. 1 they exist)(default). 0 Priority statusforreceiving timeouts— Audio bitrate— bitrate— Video 2 1 0 Bit ratecontrol type 2 1 Output mode 3 2 1 Encode profile "space". alpha-numeric characterspermittedexcept 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Record framerate 99 6 5 4 3 2 1 Record resolution GOP length— =LPCM2CH(default) =Analog(defaultofinput3) dd, =Verbose modeandtaggedresponses forqueries =Tagged responses forqueries =Verbose mode(defaultforUSBandRS‑232 =Use =CBR =CVBR only =Video andaudio =Video =High =Main =Base ======SXGA(1280x1024) =XGA(1024x768) =WCIF(512x288) =1080p =720p =480p =Disableaudio =Clear/none(defaultforTelnet connections) =Use =VBR(default) =Custom host control) 5 10 12 12.5 15 24 25 30 E ven,

, 115200 Configure Send

N

one (default),

datastringcommandparameters(if

1 to ) 200 80

9600

, 30

1 7 96 to receive timeoutcommand (default), ,

8 , 10000 (default) [default], 128 M ark, ,

192 2 S pace 19200 , 256

, , 320 38400 | 103 , and ,

X50# X50% X50$ X50@ X50! X50) X10) X6& X6( X6* X6$ X5! X4( X4* ======Input number 3 2 1 Stream selection (for example: last three pairsofMACaddress Default name—Combinationofmodeland padded. Default: Port timeoutintensofseconds page 127 EDID resolution (see EDID userlocation( 2 1 0 HDMI output 3 2 1 0 Executive mode: 03 02 01 Aspect ratio 2 1 Output refresh rate 1 0 Encoding mode 2 1 Output channel 1 Stream name Input videoformat 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 =Completelockout(nofront panelcontrol) = = =Dualchannelmode =B(input3,4,and5) =A(input1and2) or =Confidence =Archive ChannelB(Available forDualModeonly) =Archive ChannelA =Confidencelayout =ChannelBfullscreen =Allowrecording controls only =Menulockout(menuonly) =Compositemode =ChannelAfullscreen =Off (default) =Auto-SDI(Input5default) =SDI =HD-SDI =3G-SDI =Composite =YUVi =YUVp/HDTV(default) =Fit(theinputiszoomedintofilltheentire =Follow(theinputisdisplayedinitsnative =Fill(theinputautomaticallyfillstheentire output 50 60 output rasterwhilemaintainingitsaspectratio) aspect ratio) raster; default) 2 digitcommand,Two-digit response

Hz Hz ) (default)

SMP-351-07-8C-EC 1

to

00030 5

1

Table 1.EDIDValues ,

2

, and =

300 3

) seconds) 1

to ) 65000 on (zero

SMP 300Series •RemoteCommunication andControl X53# X50& X51@ X51! X51) X50^ X53( X53* X53@ X53! X53) X52( X51$ ======2 1 0 Overscan Metadata value— 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Metadata parameter (two-digit response — Streaming preset — Input preset number— Preset name—Upto 1 User/Encoder/Layout Preset number— “coverage”:Coverage1”...} PROFILE01, “contributor”:“Contributor1, (for example: Json stringofrecording profile parameters Default =Input Input name,upto16characters— 1 0 HDCP notification 2 1 0 HDCP status -180 Audio levelin 60001 60000 40007 40006 40005 40004 40003 40002 40001 40000 Audio selection = = =Relation =Publisher =Language =Identifier(viewonly) =Format =Description =Date(viewonly) =Presenter =Coverage to = =Contributor =On(green HDCPnotification -screen, default) =Sink/source detectedbutnoHDCP =HDCPdetected, =Off (muteoutputtoblack) =Nosink/source detected =Course =SystemName =Type =Title =Subject =Source =Rights 5.0 2.5 0 32 %(default=HDMIinputs) to (two-digitresponse — =Output(Right,foraudiomutecontrol only) =DigitalinputB(Right) =DigitalinputB(Left) =AnalogInputB(Right) =AnalogInputB(Left) =DigitalinputA(Right) =DigitalinputA(Left) =AnalogInputA(Right) =Output(Left,foraudiomutecontrol only) =AnalogInputA(Left) %(default:YUVpinput) % (default: YUVi andcompositeinputs) %(default:YUVi 240

{“id”:1,“name”:“RECORD

=

0.1 X

-18.0 where

dBsteps— 127

1

to 16 0 charactermaximum to

1 X padding) characters to 16 istheinputnumber +24.0

128

0

padding) dB

104

X56# X54# X56% X54% X56^ X56$ X56) X55! X54@ X54! X54) X54^ X54$ ======Video OutputFrameRate Video paused recording stopped Recorder status 1 0 Thumbnail size 2 1 0 File size(inmegaBytes) N/A usbrcp usbrear usbfront internal auto Recording destination Recorder timeinminutes— 2 1 0 Recording status RTMP URL(string) RTMP 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Test ( patterns Audio delay— Encoder Presets — 14 13 12 11 3 2 1 0 Destination 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 =Pause =Start =UniversalOSD(Compositemode only) (Compositemodeonly) =Timestamp =Pulse =Crop =Aspectratio =Aspectratio =Aspectratio =Colorbars =USBRear =USBFront =Internal =Followsarchive resolution =Dualrecording enabled =Singlerecording enabled =Off (default) =Auto =Normal(default) =Recording disabled =Stop ======Internal +USBRCP =Internal +USBRear =Internal +USBFront =Internal +Auto =Internal 5 Hz 10 Hz 12 Hz 12.5 Hz 15 Hz 24 Hz 25 Hz 30 Hz

0

0

to

to 1.85 1.78 1.33

8 999 1

)

to

ms

32

1 to 60

SMP 300Series •RemoteCommunication andControl X59# X62# X61# X60# X56& X59! X58@ X58! X60& X60% X59@ X62$ X62@ X62! X61@ X61! X60( X60* X60^ X60$ ======NOTE: 4 3 2 0 USB Storage mode 2 1 0 Recording mode No bars= Full bars= -1500 Front panelaudiolevelindication (Dualmonoenabledonly) 5 (Dualmonoenabledonly) 4 3 2 1 Audio output Pixel phaseadjustment— Delay durationinseconds— Valid DB_IDnumber(integer) characters (default= SNMP privatecommunitystring,upto (default = SNMP publiccommunitystring,upto64characters (default = SNMP location,upto64characters (default = SNMP contactnametext,upto Vertical size— Horizontal size— resolution Vertical centering—Varies basedonarchive resolution Horizontal centering—Varies basedonarchive Picture adjust— resolution) the detectedresolution (rangevaries basedoninput Active pixels—Upto resolution) the detectedresolution (rangevaries basedoninput Active lines—Upto the detectedrate Total pixels—Upto (default = Horizontal andverticalstart— =USBRCP =USBRear =USBFront +SecondaryRecording =Internal inComposite =SingleRecording inCompositemode =ChannelAdualmono+B =ChannelA+Bdualmono =ChannelA+B(Dualmonodisableonly) =ChannelBonly(Dualmonodisableonly) =ChannelAonly(Dualmonodisableonly) =AllUSBstorage =ChannelAdisabled including hyphens,underscores and periods. can beupto64alphanumeric characters

to Example: Format: SNMP namesandcommunity strings 0 < public Not Not 128) 0

-600

Specified Specified 64

left*right

0 -58*-63 to 120 ) to

+ + private 4096 127 (

+ to

512 256

512 4096 0 ofthedefaultvaluefor ofthedefaultvaluefor ) ) to ofthedefaultvaluefor

default = 5

to 0 ) 63

to 64 60 (default= characters 255

.

64) 64

105 32)

Command andResponseTables Information Requests Command Function KEY: NOTE: idle Query systemprocessor usage Query systemprocessor connected users Query numberof Query LinkLicense Query MACaddress Query serialnumber usage Query systemmemory Query modeldescription Query modelname Query partnumber version Updated firmware Factory firmware version Bootstrap Version Verbose versioninfo version Firmware andbuild Firmware version the defaultfactoryfirmware isrunning.Anexclamationpoint(!)indicatescorruptedfirmware. Theseapplyto loaded. Acaret (^)indicatesthefirmware versionthatshouldberunning,butaMode 1reset

X1! An asterisk(*)aftertheversionnumberindicatescurrently runningversion.Questionmarks(?.??)indicatethatonlyfactoryfirmware is

= Firmware version number

12I 11I 10I 3I 2I 1I Example: 4Q Example: 3Q 2Q E Example: 98I 99I (Host toDevice) SIS Command 0Q *Q/q Q or1Q N

LELIC

}

NN NN N 1.00.0000-b2325(1.81LX- time X1! X1! 79-2547-XX Dual RecordingUpgrade, 00:05:A6:HH:HH:HH Example: #Bytes usedoutof#KBytes Streaming Example: 00:12 UTC) SMP 351 1.00.0004-b2635*(1.81LX- time X1! 20:10 UTC) SMP 351 -Sat,01Nov2014 Sum of X1!] X1!] (Device toHost) Response 60-1324-01 ] ] ] SMP 300Series •RemoteCommunication andControl

plusWeb ver. -descUL date/ ] ] ] plus Web ver. -descUL date/ 2Q-3Q-4Q A13VE3R

SMP -Sun, ] •

Media ]] ] • ] 351

02 ] ] ] •

Nov Processor ] Rear PanelReset

2014 ]

] 0Q-4Q. is theversionSMPreverts to user replaceable. Thisfirmware Factory installedfirmware isnot troubleshooting. may needthisinformationfor not userreplaceable, butyou The bootstrapfirmware is version. installed, andupdatedfirmware Show bootstrap,factory- Returns a percentageReturns oftotal. a percentageReturns oftotal. Number ofusers. with each displaysonaseparateline If multiplelicenseare installed, ]] If licensenotinstalled,returns string. addresses inacolonseparated oneormoreReturns MAC theserialnumber.Returns SMP 352,or3523G-SDI SMP 351,3513G-SDI, Series. been uploadedintotheSMP 300 which versionoffirmware has Use thiscommandtofindout after amode1reset. decimal places( places plusbuildnumberto4 Firmware versionto2decimal places ( Firmware versionto2decimal Additional Description 60-1634-12 60-1634-11 and400GBSSD 60-1324-12 SSD 60-1324-11 60-1324-02 60-1324-01 onpage 18 ]] .

1.00 after thelastlicense. ). wasexecutedand : SMP3523G-SDI : SMP352 : SMP3513G-SDI : SMP351400GB : SMP3513G-SDI : SMP351or 1.12.1234

). 106

Clear Alarms Sync Schedule Storage Info Command Function NOTES: View activealarms View Clear activealarms Unsolicited response Trigger schedulesync Query RCPUSB Query rear USB Query front USB Query internal Query layoutpreset streaming presets Query Confidence presets Query ChBstreaming streaming presets Query Archive/ChA encoder presets Query Confidence only) presets (DualChannel Query CHBencoder encoder presets Query Archive/ChA status Query selectedinput Query filetransferconfig Query eth • •

For the< For allUSBports,eachnew<

0 linkstatus active > field,thedevicewill respond with

13I (Host toDevice) SIS Command If noactivealarms 39I E E 58I 57I 56I 55I Example: 49I Example: Example: 48I 47I 46I Example: Example: 45I 44I 43I Example: Example: 42I 38I CALRM STRGR

name } } > fieldsignifiesanewpartitiononthatUSBdrive,and are separated byacomma(,).

0 , 1 , or * * 3*720 High,0*modified,not 3*720 High,1*1080p * *, * *, * *, 1920x1080*50*1 ChA*Input1Name*n/a*n/a*0,ChB4*Input4Name* 720x480*60*1 ChA1*Input1Name*1920x1080*60*1,ChB3*Input3Name* resolution>**<1/0>,ChB***... ,***free>* ***free>** *... ,***free>* ***free>** *... ,***free>* ***free>** * Internal***free>* 3*PBP * *, 0*modified,not 3*RTMPYouTube * 2 : 0 SMP 300Series •RemoteCommunication andControl =notactive, (full/half) ] ] Mid ] \\Network_Storage\Folder,cifs

] LFT,7*Side ]

1 ] (up/down)* =singlerecording active, ]

saved

]

name>*

rate>*<1/0> ] High

By

Side ] speed inMB

saved ]

name>**

] ] ] ] ] ] ] ]

.

]

107

Front PanelLockout(Executive Mode) Backup/Restore System Commands Resets Name Unit Command Function KEY: KEY: KEY: NOTE: NOTE: Restart thenetwork View Executivemode View Set Executivemode Reboot system Restore configuration Save configuration View verbosemode View Set verbosemode unitname View and deleterecording files Reset alldevicesettings defaults) System reset (factory Reset flash Absolute reset View TelnetView connections Set unitnametodefault Set unitname

web/direct access)inorder topreserve communicationwiththedevice.

X5! X1) X10) X2# X1@ If taggedresponses isenabled,allread commandsreturn thedata,sameassettingvaluedoes. This reset excludesIPsettingssuchasaddress, subnetmask,gatewayIPaddress, unitname,DHCP settingandportmapping(Telnet/ =Configurationtype =Unitname =Executivemode

= Verbose mode = Defaultname

E E E E (Host toDevice) SIS Command Verbose mode 2/3 E E E X1@ E E E E X X5! E E X2# E

ZY ZXXX ZFFF ZQQQ CC • 2BOOT 1BOOT 0* 1* CV CN X

CN } } X1) } X1) } CN character mustnotbeaminus. and theminussign/hyphen(-).Thefirstcharactermustbeanalphacharacter. Thelast Unit nameisatextstringofupto63charactersfrom thealphabet( 0 3 2 1 0 0 Combination ofmodelnameandlastthree pairsofMACaddress (Example: CV } =Verbose modeandtaggedresponses forqueries(Example:command: =Tagged responses forqueries =Verbose mode(defaultforUSBandRS-232hostcontrol) =Off, =IPconfig(ip.cfg), =Clear/none(defaultforTelnet connections) } } } } } } } XF XF } } 1 =Completelockout(nofront panelcontrol),

2 =Boxspecificparameters(box.cfg) Zpy Zpx Zpf Zpq Icc N Ipn Ipn (Device toHost) Response Boot2 X5!] Exe Boot1 Cfg0* Cfg1* X2#] Vrb X1@ ] SMP 300Series •RemoteCommunication andControl ] ] ] ] X10) X1@

X2#] X5!] ] N

] ] ] X1)] X1)]

]

]

2 =Menulockout,

A - Z ), digits( subnet masktodefaults. returns theIPaddress and Same as recorded files address, deletealluserand Reset todefaultexceptIP deletes recorded files. Resets devicetodefaultand (excludes recording files). Reset flashmemory connections. N Additional Description Complete systemreboot. location (/nortxe-backup). Load configurationfrom file location (/nortxe-backup). Save configurationtofile 3 =NumberofactiveIP =Allowrecording controls only E SMP-351-07-8C-EC CV 0 - 9 } ), System

Response:

Reset

Vrb3 ) , plus ] )

108

SSL Port SSH (SIS)Port SNMP Port Web Port Telnet Port Port Assignment Command Function NOTES: View SSLportmap View Disable SSLport Reset SSLportmap Set SSLportmap SSHportmap View Disable SSHport Reset SSHportmap Set SSHportmap SNMPportmap View Disable SNMPport Reset SNMPportmap Set SNMPportmap webportmap View Disable webport Reset webportmap Set webportmap TelnetView portmap Disable Telnet port Reset Telnet portmap Set Telnet portmap • • setting itto Remapping of returned. Duplicate

port# 0 ). port# assignmentsare notpermitted(forexample,theTelnet andwebportassignmentcannotbethesame)

assignmentsmustbetoports (Host toDevice) SIS Command E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E [port#]MH [port#]MT S 443PMAP S[port#]PMAP B PMAP B 0PMAP B 22023PMAP B[port#]PMAP A PMAP A 0PMAP A 161PMAP A[port#]PMAP MH 0MH 80MH MT 0MT 23MT S PMAP S 0PMAP } } } } } } } } } } } } } } } }

} } } } 1024 orhigher(unlessresetting tothedefaultportnumberordisablingby (Device toHost) Response [port#] Pmh 00000 Pmh 00080 Pmh[port#] [port#] Pmt 00000 Pmt 00023 Pmt[port#] [port#] Pmap S00000 Pmap S00443 Pmap S[port#] [port#] Pmap B00000 Pmap B22023 Pmap B[port#] [port#] Pmap A00000 Pmap A00161 Pmap A[port#] SMP 300Series •RemoteCommunication andControl ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ]

] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] Additional Description default value( Reset thewebportto default value( Reset theTelnet porttothe default value( Reset theSSLportto default value( Reset theSSHportto default value( Reset theSNMPportto 80 23 443 22023 161 ). ). E13 ). ). error is ). 109

SNMP UnitLocation SNMP AccessEnable SNMP CommunityStrings SNMP UnitContact SNMP (SimpleNetworkManagementProtocol) Command Function KEY: NOTE: KEY: KEY: KEY: View SNMPstate View Disable SNMPaccess Enable SNMPaccess string privatecommunity View string todefault Set privatecommunity string Set privatecommunity string publiccommunity View string todefault Set publiccommunity string Set publiccommunity View unitlocation View default Set unitlocationto Set unitlocation View unitcontact View default Set unitcontactto Set unitcontact

X62) X62$ X62# X62@ X62! Community stringsare referred toaspasswords intheweb-baseduserinterface. = = = = = SNMP publiccommunitystring,upto64alphanumericcharacters,hyphens,underscores andperiod(default= SNMP privatecommunitystring,upto64alphanumericcharacters,hyphens,underscores andperiod(default= SNMP location,upto64alphanumericcharacters,hyphens,underscores andperiod(default= 0 SNMP contactnametext,upto64alphanumericcharacters,hyphens,underscores andperiod =Off ordisable(default),

(Host toDevice) SIS Command E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E ESNMP E0SNMP E1SNMP XSNMP X X PSNMP P P LSNMP L L CSNMP C C • • X62$ X62# • X62@ • X62! SNMP SNMP SNMP SNMP SNMP SNMP } } } SNMP SNMP } } } } } } } 1 } =Onorenable } } } }

(Device toHost) Response SnmpP* X62) SnmpE*0 SnmpE*1 X62$] SnmpX*private SnmpX* X62#] SnmpP*public X62@] SnmpL*Not Snmp L* X62!] SnmpC*Not SnmpC* SMP 300Series •RemoteCommunication andControl

] X62#] X62$] X62!] X62@] ] ]

• • Specified Specified ] ] ] ] Additional Description to Sets publiccommunitystring theunitlocation. View default setting. Sets theunitlocationto Sets theunitlocationto View theSNMPaccesssetting. View Disable SNMPaccess. Enable SNMPaccess. string. theprivatecommunity View to thedefaultsetting. Sets privatecommunitystring to Sets privatecommunitystring string. thepubliccommunity View default. Sets communitystringtothe View theunitcontact. View default setting. Sets theunitcontactto Sets theunitcontactto Not Specified X62# X62$ . . public private ). ). X62! X62@

). . . 110

IP SetupCommands Command Function KEY: NOTE: KEY: address DNSserverIP View address Set DNSserverIP address gatewayIP View Set gatewayIPaddress subnetmask View Set subnetmask address hardwareView MAC IPaddressView Set IPaddress mask, gateway IPaddress,View subnet mask, gateway Set IPaddress, subnet DHCPmode View Set DHCPoff Set DHCPon alltimezones View timezone View Set timezone date /time View date /time Set Default Default DNS: Gateway: (for instance; Example:

X1^ X1* X1& X1% X1$ X1# X( The CISGcommandresets thenetworkimmediatelywithoutneedforaBOOTcommand.

= On/off =Hardware MAC address =SubnetMask

=Localdate/time = IPAddress zone = Time = Time zoneoffset = Time

Acronym (2to6letters)Example:PSTforPacificStandard Time (Host toDevice) SIS Command E X1^ E E X1& Verbose mode2/3 E E E E X1^ E E X1^ Example: E E E E E E Example: E E E X1$ E HH:MM:SS CT E 1* CH CI CG DH 0DH 1DH *TZON TZON MM/DD/YY- DI CS 1CISG PST *TZON CT X1^ } } } } } } } DI CG CI *TZON CS from GMTtimeandincludesthezonename.Example: Read: dayofweek,date,month,yearHH:MM:SS Set: MM/DD/YY GMT offset value( 0 } } =Disabled/unassigned/off/unmuted (default), } * } } } } } X1& } } * } } X1^ 00-05-A6- Default IPaddress: Default:

Fri, CISG -HH:MM:SS – 12:00 255.255.0.0

21 }

xx Jun 0.0.0.0 - to xx

(Device toHost) Response 2002

X1^ Ipd X1^ Ipg X1& Ips Iph X1* X1^ X( Idh0 Idh1 X1$ ... X1$ • PST*(UTC-08:00/UTC-07:00 X1$ Tzon Ipi 192.168.254.254/16*0.0.0.0 IP Cisg1*IP Tzon X1# Ipt 0.0.0.0 Pacific Time 192.168.254.254 14:00 -

/

SMP 300Series •RemoteCommunication andControl xx ] * * *

]

subnet

] ] ] ] ] • • • • • •

X1% X1% X1%

10:54:00

X1^ X1^ X1& X1* X1^ X1# ] ] • •

PST*(UTC-08:00/UTC-07:00) X1$ ) representing hoursandminutes(

]] ] ]

] ] ] ] ]

] * /

subnet X1% bits*gateway )

]

] 1 =Enabled/assigned/on/muted

bits*gateway

PST*(UTC-08:00) ] ) ] HH:MM ] Additional Description 1 0 Sets DHCPtooff. Sets DHCPtoon. to beginningofstring Verbose mode2/3adds Repeats foralltimezones string adds Verbose mode2/3response IP address. theDNSserver View (default: Set theDNSserverIPaddress thegatewayIPaddress.View Set thegatewayIPaddress. address oftheunit. thehardwareView MAC View thedateandtime. View Set thedateandtime. =DHCP on. =DHCP off (default) • Pacific Time ) localtimeisoffset Tzon

Pacific 0 . 0

• . 0 tobeginningof . 0 ).

Time ]

Tzon

• 111

RS-232 Port Password andSecuritySettings Command Function KEY: KEY: KEY: timeout serialportreceiveView timeout Set serialportreceive serialportsettings View Reset serialport parameters Configure serialport timeout globalIPport View timeout Set globalIPport timeout currentView port Set current porttimeout level sessionsecurity View password Reset (clear)user userpasswordView Set userpassword administrator password Reset (clear) password administrator View password Set administrator both (min= (min=

X3# X2* X2& X2^ X2% X2@ X2! X2) X1( X6( =RS-232stopbits =Lengthdelimiter =RS-232databits =RS-232baudrate

= RS-232parity = Primaryportstatus = Intercharacter timeout = Porttimeout = Porttimeout = Upto 128

alpha-numericcharacters. In tensofseconds,zero padded (Host toDevice) SIS Command E E E E E E E E E E X3# E E E E X3# E E 1* 1* 1CE 1CP 1*9600,n,8,1CP 1 1* 0 TC 0 CK • CU • CA CU CA

TC * X1( X2% X6( } } } X6( CU CA case sensitive,mustusecapital Value isplacedpriortoparameter: Priority statusforreceiving timeouts: 1 7 O 9600 1 D L Parameter toseteitherthe intensofmillisecondstowaitbetweencharacterscomingintoaserialportbefore terminating Time intensofmillisecondstowaitforcharacterscomingintoaserialportbefore terminating Time } } } } } } (default), , dd, =Use =decimalvalueforASCIIcharacter. (min= = * , 8 # } } TC TC X2) (default) X2^ =byte count(min= X1( E 0 0 (default), ven, , max= , max= } } * , and Configure X2@ X2& 2 N

one (default), * , X2) 32767 32767 X2! X2* 19200 musthavebothvalues= }

CE CP . Default: , default: receive timeoutcommandparameters(default= } } , 0 1 38400 , max= to M 65000 L (Device toHost) Response ark, X1( Cpn01 X2% Cpn Cpn X6( Pti1 X6( Pti 0 n Ipu **** Ipu Ipa **** Ipa ength ofmessagetoreceive, orthe ] 10 2 , 32767 SMP 300Series •RemoteCommunication andControl = 57600 , , D S

• • • • ] ] = 01 01 orcapital pace X2) X2^ ] X3#] ] X3#] (default:

] ] 20

* 3 * 100 • bytelength=“ X6( • • X6( 0 ms).Theresponse isreturned withleadingzeros. Commandsusing Cce . Default= , Ccp Ccp , =Use

, X2@ X2& ms).Theresponse isreturned withleadingzeros. 115200

]

]

X1( 0 X2% X2% , 00030 orbothsettonon-zero. L , 0 X2! . Theresponse isreturned withleadingzeros. Send X2* , max= , , , 0L X2) X2^ X2^ baud

]

= = ] datastringcommandparameterswhenavailable, 3L 0 , 00255 , , bytecount). 300 X2@ ” andASCII

X2& X2& seconds) , , , X2! . Default= X2*] X2*]

] D

elimiter value. 0A

delimiteris“ 00000L 0 ). Additional Description 11 Security levelofconnection response is If nopassword isset,the response is If nopassword isset,the

= User, ).

10D 12 ] ] ”. Theparameteris

= Administrator (no (no

**** ****

) ). .

112

Input VideoAspectRatio Input Selection File Commands Command Function KEY: KEY: NOTE: View aspectsetting View Set tofit(zoom) Set tofollow Set tofill channel inputselection/ View inputname View Set inputname input3format View Set input3format selectedinput View Select input directory andbelow List filesfrom current and sub-directories Erase current directory and includedfiles Erase current directory currentView directory Up onedirectory torootReturn directory Change directory the SIScommand

X50! X4( X51$ X50$ X50@ X50! Folders andfilesinthe

= Aspectratio

=Inputname =Inputvideoformat =Outputchannel = Inputnumber = Inputnumber Delete Recording EventandFilesbyDB_ID

(Host toDevice) SIS Command E X50! E X50! E X50! E X50! 32I E X50! E X50! 3\ 3* X50@ Example: X50! E E E E E E E /recordings/ X50$ /EF CJ .. / path/directory/ LF // ! * CJ EF X50@ CJ }

} Name (upto 1 03 02 01 1 1 1 \ }

,

} =YUVp/HDTV(default), = to to ASPR *3ASPR *2ASPR *1ASPR NI } } X51$ =Fit(theinputiszoomedintofilltheentire outputrasterwhilemaintainingits aspectratio) =Follow(theinputisdisplayedinitsnativeaspectratio) =Fill(theinputautomaticallyfillstheentire outputraster:default) ! A } 5 5 (Input

} NI folderare read-only andcannotbedeletedwith } } } }

1 16 and characters).Defaultis"Input CJ 2 } ), 2 = B 2 (Input = YUVi, =YUVi, (Device toHost) Response 02*01 In X4(] Aspr Aspr Aspr ChA X51$] Nmi X50$] Typ 03* X50!] space_remaining ... path/filename path/filename path/filename Ddl Ddl path/directory/ Dirl Dirl/ Dirl path/directory/ onpage 126

X50! SMP 300Series •RemoteCommunication andControl X50! X50! ] ] X50! X50! X50!

3 ] path/directory/ , ] 3 * 4 =Composite X50$] X50@] *ChB , , and *03 *02 *01 X51$] . • • •

date/time date/time date/time 5 X50!] ] ] ] • X )

Bytes Left " where "

] • • • length length length X ]] " istheinputnumber /EF ]

] ] ] ]

command.Recordings canbedeletedwith

Additional Description input Switches channel Sets input Sets input Sets input to Set theinputsource channel theinputsourceView returned in2-digitresponses. filename/date/time/bytes left Also deletesfilesinsidedirectory X51$ X50! . X50@ . X50! X50! X50! X50! . tofit. tofollow. tofill. and X50@

X50! X50@ X50! to name are for 113

Audio Metadata commands(Forcompositemodeonly) SMP Recording FolderShared onSMD RCP 101ExecutiveMode Auto‑Image andMemory Command Function KEY: KEY: KEY: KEY: KEY: level indicators frontView panelaudio Query outputmetadata Set outputmetadata Query path setting Query foldershare Disable foldershare Enable foldershare Query status Executive modeoff Executive modeon AutoMemory View Set AutoMemoryoff Set AutoMemoryon current output Performs Auto‑Imageto Auto‑Image View Auto‑Image perinput Enable/disable

Example: Example:

X53( X53* X58! X( X( X50@ X50! X( =On/off = On/off = On/off =Metadataparameter =Front panelaudiolevel

= Metadatavalue = Outputchannel = Inputnumber

(Host toDevice) SIS Command E E Example: Verbose 2/3mode 34I E E Verbose mode2/3 E E E E 99 99 99 E E E X50@ X50! X50!

* * * M2 M M2 M P1SHRF E1SHRF E1 AMEM 0AMEM 1AMEM E1

*A * X 0X 1X A X53* X53* X( *

RCDR * * cannot beupdatedoncetherecording starts.Newmetadataisappliedtothenextrecording. Up to127alpha-numericcharacters.Allmetadatavaluesare cleared tobeready forthenextdata.Metadata 12 6 0 0 0 1 1 0 ProfessorX

A 0SHRF =Identifier(viewonly), = to =Contributor, =Disabled/unassigned/off/unmuted (default), =Disabled/unassigned/off/unmuted (default), =Disabled/unassigned/off/unmuted (default), 1SHRF } =Subject, RCDR * } } A 5 X53( } } (Inputs1and2), }

} } } left*right RCDR

13 RCDR 1 = Title, =Title, } =Coverage, } 2 = : 7 14 -1500 =Language,8Publisher, B (Device toHost) Response =Type, -58*-63 Inf34* X58! ProfessorX X53( ] RcdrM2 RcdrM ShrfP1*< < X( ] ShrfE1 ShrfE1 X( ] Exe99 Exe99 X(] Amem0 Amem1 Img X(] Img (Inputs3,4,and5) SMP SMP 300Series •RemoteCommunication andControl 2 to X50@] X50! =Presenter, *

X58!] IP>:/var/uf/recordings ] X53* * ] 0 * 15 , Fullbars= X58! * 1 * * 0 * ProfessorX 1 ] ] =SystemName, 0 ] X(] SMP ] ] *

] * X53(] X58!]

IP>:/var/uf/recordings 3 =Date(viewonly), 1 1 1 =Enabled/assigned/on/muted =Enabled/assigned/on/muted =Enabled/assigned/on/muted 0 , Nobars= ] 9 =Relation,10Rights, 16 =Course ≤-600 4 =Description,5Format, ]

Additional Description left*right View foldershareView status. share. Disable SMPRecording folder share. Allow SMPRecording folder X50@ current inputselectionofoutput Performs Auto‑Imagetothe .

11 ] =Source,

114

Recording Audio-only Recording Command Function KEY: KEY: View recordView destination Set record Destination disabled) (secondary recording recordView destination enabled) (secondary recording recordView destination recording enabled) remaining (secondary recordView time recording disabled) remaining (secondary recordView time of recording duration/elapsed time recordingView enabled) (secondary recording Recording status disabled) (secondary recording Recording status Execute swap Add chaptermarker Extend record time recordView status Pause recording Start recording Stop recording View status View recording Disable audio-only recording Enable audio-only

X56) X54^ X54@ X54! X54) X50@ X50! X(

= On/off =Time =Recording status =Recording destination

= Recorder status = Outputchannel = Inputnumber = Destination

(Host toDevice) SIS Command 37I Verbose 2/3mode 37I Verbose 2/3mode: 36I Verbose 2/3mode 36I Verbose 2/3mode 35I I I % E E E E E E E E E E E D D B E Y Y2 Y1 Y0 A1RCDR A1 A1

X56) X54! RCDR RCDR RCDR

RCDR RCDR * * RCDR 0

0RCDR 1RCDR =Disabled/unassigned/off/unmuted (default), RCDR } } } RCDR } } } } } } } stopped, usbfront, usbrear, usbrcp, N/A 12 0 0 1 1 MM ( auto, internal, usbfront,auto, internal, usbrear, usbrcp }

= to =Auto =Stop, = Internal +USBFront, =Internal A 5 0 (Input1and2),

to , 1 60 1 =Record, minutes) = Internal, =Internal, (Device toHost) Response Tke RcdrB RcdrE X54)] RcdrY2 RcdrY1 RcdrY0 X56)] RcdrD X54@ ] Inf37*internal internal Inf36*HH:MM:SS X54@ internal Inf36* X54@ Inf35*HH:MM:SS HH:MM:SS record>

] 2 • = •

X50! X50! 2

= Pause HH:MM:SS HH:MM:SS ] X54!] X56) ] =USBFront

B record> 13 ] ]

X54@ ] (Input3,4,and5) * * * 0 1 = Internal +USBRear, =Internal +USBRCP 14=Internal

* * ]

ChB ChB X54@]

HH:MM:SS* • free

HH:MM:SS

X50! X50! 1

] ] *

, =Enabled/assigned/on/muted remain_internal*time

]

space*external * 3 X54@] =USBRear, > > *

* <

<

X54^ ] X54^

remain> > > *

positions. Swap channelAandB extend by For scheduledrecordings only, next recording. recordingView destinationfor recording(s). Select record destinationfor recording Displays recording Displays recording Displays >* free

space> X54@

external> 00:00:00 00:00:00 00:00:00

X54! space >*

* minutes.

in whennot whennot whennot ]

KBytes>

115

*

Recall LayoutPreset (for confidenceinDualChannelmodeonly) Layout Presets (forcompositemodeonly) Input Presets User Presets Presets Command Function KEY: KEY: KEY: Recall layoutpreset defaults Reset layoutpreset to Query preset name Set preset name Recall layoutpreset Recall layoutpreset Save layoutpreset Query inputpresets Delete inputpreset presetView name Set preset name Save preset Recall preset Query userpresets Query username Set username Save userpreset Recall userpreset

X53! X53) X53@ X53! X50! X( X53! X53) X50@ X50! X(

= On/off = On/off =User/Encoder/LayoutPreset Number =Inputpreset number =Preset Name =Inputnumber =Preset Name =Preset Name =User/Encoder/LayoutPreset Number =Outputchannel =Inputnumber

(Host toDevice) SIS Command E 8* 7* 9 E E 7 Verbose mode2/3 51# E E E 2* 2* Verbose mode2/3 52* E E 1* 1*

* * X53) X53) X50! X50! X50@ X50@

X53) 3* X7 7* 7* X 2* 2* 1* 1* X50! 2* X53) X53) X53) X53@ X53@ X53) X53) * . . * * * * , X53@ X53) X53@ X53@ X53) X53) #

.

PNAM , PNAM , PNAM , X53! PRST X53! X53! PRST , . , . 1 1 0 1 1 0 Up to Up to

} } } to to =ChannelA, to =Disabled/unassigned/off/unmuted (default), =Disabled/unassigned/off/unmuted (default), PNAM PNAM PNAM } } 128 5 5 1

16 16 to } } } characters characters 32 1 Up to to

32 2 16 =ChannelB (Device toHost) Response 9Rpr3 PrstX7* X53!] Pnam7* 8Rpr 7Rpr 7Spr PreI 2Spr 2Rpr PreU X( X53!] Pnam1* 1Spr 1Rpr X( PrstX2* X53!] Pnam2*

characters

1 1 SMP 300Series •RemoteCommunication andControl

X( X( X53)] X53)] X53)] X50! X50! X50! X50@ X50@ X( 2 2

* X( X( 1 X53) X53) X53@ X53)]

X( X53)] X53@] 3... * * * * * 3...

X53@] X53@] X53)] X53)] 2 X(

X( X( X( , , , 1 X53!] X53!] X53!] 128 16

3... X( ] ] X( 2

X( 128 3... ] X( 1 1 16 =Enabled/assigned/on/muted =Enabled/assigned/on/muted ] Additional Description channel mode. confidence encoderindual Recall layoutpreset to Reset Set without inputselections. Recall layoutpreset including inputselections. Recall layoutpreset Save layoutpreset to name Set preset number number Set channel X53) X53! X53) X53) to . todefaults X53! X50@ .

. topreset X53) X53) X53) X53) X53) to

. to 116

Streaming Presets Stream Name(forRTSP PULLstream) Encoder Presets Command Function KEY: KEY: KEY: Delete orclearpreset View presetView name Set preset name Save preset Recall preset streamView name Set stream name default Reset encoderpreset to name encoderpresetView Set preset name Save preset Recall preset

X53) X51$ X50) X50% X50) X56# X51$ X50) =Streaming presets =Encoder/Streaming preset name =Streaming Encoder =Stream name

= Streaming Encoder = Streaming Encoder = Encoder/Streaming preset name = Encoderpresets

(Host toDevice) SIS Command E E E 3* 3* Verbose mode2/3 E E E E E 4* 4* X50) X50) X50) X50)

N N X 3* 3* X 4* 4* X50) X50) 3* 4* X53) X53) X56# X56# * * * * X53) X56# X53) X56# X53) X56# STRC * X50% PNAM , PNAM , PRST X51$ PRST X51$ . . , , } STRC

} } PNAM PNAM

} } } } } 3 =ConfidenceChannelA 3 =ConfidenceChannelA 3 =ConfidenceChannelA 1 =Archive ChannelA,2=Archive ChannelB(Available forDualChannelonly) 1 =Archive ChannelA,2=Archive Channel B(Available forDualChannelonly) Up to 1 1 Up to Up to 1 =Archive ChannelA,2=Archive ChannelB(Available for Dual Channelonly) to to 32 32 16 16 16 (Device toHost) Response PrstX3* StrcN X51$] Pnam3* 3Spr 3Rpr StrcN X50%] PrstX4* X51$] Pnam4* 4Spr 4Rpr (twodigitresponse — characters characters characters SMP 300Series •RemoteCommunication andControl X50) X50) X50) X50) X50) X50)

X53) X56# X53)] X56#] * * * *

* X53)] X53)] * X56#] X56#]

X50%] , X50%] , X51$] X51$]

0 padding) Additional Description to [unassigned] and setsEncoderpreset name [unassigned] Streaming preset nameto Clears preset preset thenameofStreamingView X53) Set encoderpreset number selected channel Saves Streaming preset for Recalls Streaming preset Clears Encoderpreset preset thenameofEncoder View X56# Set encoderpreset number selected channel Saves Encoderpreset for Recalls Encoderpreset

X50) X50) toname toname X53) X56# X53) X51$ X51$ , andsets . .

X56# X56#

X56#

X53) X53) , for

for 117

Vertical Start Total Pixels Horizontal Start Pixel Phase Input Adjustments(Input3only) Command Function KEY: KEY: KEY: value Decrement verticalstart value Increment verticalstart Set verticalstart start Increment horizontal Set horizontalstart totalpixels View value Decrement totalpixels value Increment totalpixels Set totalpixelsvalue View verticalstart View horizontalstart View start Decrement horizontal value View value Decrement pixelphase value Increment pixelphase Set pixelphase

X60$ X60% X60# =Horizontalandverticalstart =Total pixels =Pixelphase

(Host toDevice) SIS Command E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 + * - + * - + * - - + * VSRT HSRT TPIX PHAS VSRT X60$ HSRT X60$ TPIX TPIX X60% VSRT HSRT PHAS PHAS X60# } } } } VSRT HSRT TPIX PHAS } } } } } } } } 0 0 Up to+ } } } }

to to 255 63 (default: 512 (default: ofthedefaultvaluefordetectedrange 32 (Device toHost) Response X60%] Tpix Tpix Tpix Vsrt Vsrt Vsrt Hsrt Hsrt X60#] Phas03 X60$] X60$] Hsrt Phas03 Phas03 128 ) SMP 300Series •RemoteCommunication andControl )

03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 * * * * * * * * * * * * X60#] X60#] X60#] X60%] X60%] X60%] X60$] X60$] X60$] X60$] X60$] X60$]

Additional Description View totalpixelsforinput View for input Decrement thetotalpixels for input Increment thetotalpixels input 3to Set totalpixels(perline)for pixelphase View 3 Decrement pixelphaseofinput X60$ theverticalstartvalue View pixel. value Decrement theverticalstart X60$ Increment theverticalstart value input 3to Set theverticalstartvalueof X60$ thehorizontalstartvalue View pixel. value Decrement thehorizontalstart pixel. value Increment thehorizontalstart input 3to Set thehorizontalstartvaluefor Increment pixelphaseofinput Set input ofinput forinput ofinput X60$ X60$ X60$ 3 3 3 X60% X60$ X60$ byonepixel. byonepixel. forinput forinput forinput topixelphase 3 3 3 . . . . . byonepixel. X60# 3 3 3 byone byone byone ofinput 3 X60% X60# X60% .

3 3

118

Brightness Contrast Tint (NTSCinputonly) Color (NTSCandPAL inputsonly) Picture Adjustments Active Lines Active Pixels Command Function KEY: KEY: KEY: View Decrement value Increment value Specify avalue View Decrement value Increment value Specify avalue View Decrement value Increment value Specify avalue View Decrement value Increment value Specify avalue View activelines View Decrement activelines Increment activelines Set activelines activepixels View Decrement activepixels Increment activepixels Set activepixels

X60* X50@ X60^ X60& =Picture adjust =Outputchannel =Activelines =Activepixels

(Host toDevice) SIS Command E X50@ E X50@ E X50@ E X50@ E X50@ E X50@ E X50@ E X50@ E X50@ E X50@ E X50@ E X50@ E X50@ E X50@ E X50@ E X50@ E E E E E E E E 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - + * - + * ALIN APIX ALIN ALIN X60^ APIX APIX X60& BRIT − + BRIT CONT − + CONT TINT − + TINT * COLR * * * − + COLR X60* X60* BRIT CONT TINT X60* X60* COLR } } ALIN APIX } } } } } } } } COLR TINT BRIT CONT } } } } } } } } 000 01 Up to+ Up to+ } }

= to } } } } A, 02 127 256 512 , default: ofthedefaultvaluefordetectedresolution ofthedefaultvaluefordetectedresolution = B

(Device toHost) Response X60* ] Brit Brit Brit X60* ] Cont Cont Cont X60* ] Tint Tint Tint X60* ] Colr Colr Colr X60^] Alin03 Alin03 Alin03 X60&] Apix03 Apix03 Apix03 SMP 300Series •RemoteCommunication andControl 064 X50@ X50@ X50@ X50@ X50@ X50@ X50@ X50@ X50@ X50@ X50@ X50@ ( 3 * * * * * * -digit response) X60^] X60^] X60^] X60&] X60&] X60&] * * * * * * * * * * * * X60* ] X60* ] X60*]

X60*] X60* ] X60* ] X60* ] X60* ] X60* ] X60* ] X60* ] X60* ] Additional Description View currentView setting. Decrements brightnesslevel. Increments brightnesslevel. Sets brightnesslevel currentView setting. Decrements contrastlevel. Increments contrastlevel. Sets contrastlevelto currentView setting. Decrements tintlevel. Increments tintlevel. Sets tintlevelto currentView setting. Decrements colorlevel. Increments colorlevel. Sets colorlevelto View theactivelinesvalue View for input Decrement theactivelines for input Increment theactivelines X60^ Set activelinesforinput3to X60& theactivepixelsvalue View X60& Decrement theactivepixels for input Increment theactivepixels input 3to Set theactivepixelsperlinefor of input . ofinput forinput 3 3 3 3 . X60& byonepixel. byonepixel. byonepixel. 3 3 . . byonepixel. X60* X60* . X60* X60* . . X60^ . X60^ X60^ X60&

119

Horizontal Size(forCompositemodeonly) Video Mute Vertical Size(forCompositemode only) Vertical Centering(forComposite modeonly) Horizontal Centering(forCompositemodeonly) Command Function KEY: KEY: NOTE KEY: KEY: NOTE KEY: View videomutestatus View Unmute output Mute outputtoblack View Decrement value Increment value Specify avalue View Decrement value Increment value Specify avalue View Decrement value Increment value Specify avalue View Decrement value Increment value Specify avalue value isappliedandreturned. acceptable valueisappliedandreturned.

: :

Vertical centeringandverticalsizevaluesare adjustedinmultiples of2.Ifavalueisentered thatisnotamultipleof2,theclosestacceptable Horizontal centeringandhorizontalsizevaluesare adjustedinmultiplesof8.Ifavalueisentered thatisnotamultipleof8,theclosest X50@ X( X61# X50@ X61! X50@ X61@ X50@ X60( X50@

= =Vertical centering =Outputchannel =Outputchannel =Outputchannel =Outputchannel =Horizontalsize =Outputchannel =Vertical size

= Horizontalcentering

(Host toDevice) SIS Command E E E E E E E E E E E E X50@ X50@ X50@ E E E E 1* 1* 1* 1* 1* 1* 1* 1* 1* 1* 1* 1* 1* 1* 1* 1* B * *

0B 1B X50@ X50@ X50@ X50@ X50@ X50@ X50@ X50@ X50@ X50@ X50@ X50@ X50@ X50@ X50@ X50@ the windownevergoescompletelyoff -screen (5-digitresponse). the windownevergoescompletelyoff-screen (5-digitresponse). The valuecorresponds tothehorizontalpositionofleftedgewindow. Therangevaries,so 01 00120 01 01 0 00064 01 01 The valuecorresponds totheverticalpositionoftopedgewindow. Therangevaries,so =Disabled/unassigned/off/unmuted (default), = = = = = VSIZ − + VSIZ VCTR − + VCTR HSIZ − + HSIZ * * * HCTR − + HCTR * A A A A A X61# X61! X61@ X60( VSIZ VCTR HSIZ HCTR , , , , , to to 02 02 02 02 02 04096 04096 = = = = = } } } }

VCTR HSIZ HCTR VSIZ } } } } } } } } B B B B B

(5-digitresponse). (5-digitresponse). } } } } (Device toHost) Response X61@ ] Hsiz Hsiz Hsiz X( ] Vmt Vmt X61# ] Vsiz Vsiz Vsiz X61! ] Vctr Vctr Vctr X60( ] Hctr Hctr Hctr SMP 300Series •RemoteCommunication andControl

X50@ X50@ X50@ X50@ X50@ X50@ X50@ X50@ X50@ X50@ X50@ X50@ X50@ X50@ * *01 * * * * * * * * * * * * 00 X61! ] X61! ] X61! ] X60( ] X61@ ] X61@ ] X61@] X61# ] X61#] X61# ] X60( ] X60( ]

] ] 1 =Enabled/assigned/on/muted Additional Description View currentView setting. Decrease widthofthewindow. Increase widthofthewindow. Set horizontalsizeto 01 00 Unmute channel Mute channel currentView setting. Decrease heightofthewindow. Increase heightofthewindow. Set verticalsize(height)to currentView setting. Shift windowup. Shift windowdown. Set verticalcentering View currentView setting. Shift windowleft. Shift windowright. Set horizontalcenteringto =Muted =Unmuted

X50@

X50@ output. X61@ X61! output.

. . X61# X60( . 120 .

Enable/Disable Single/SecondaryRecording (Compositemode) RTMP Stream Enable/Disable RTMP (backup)DestinationURL/Stream Key RTMP (primary)DestinationURL/Stream Key Stream Enable/Disable Encoder Settings(Archive EncodeandRecording) RTMP Stream Status Command Function KEY: KEY: KEY: KEY: View recordView status Recording disable enable Secondary recording Single recording enable stream push RTMP View stream push Enable RTMP URL RTMP View Set RTMP URL Set RTMP URL RTMP View URL Set RTMP View streamView status Stream enable Status Query backupRTMP Status Query primaryRTMP

X58@ X56^ X50) X50) X( X50) X( X* = = =Status =Stream selection =Stream selection =Recording mode URL(string) =RTMP =Stream selection

Verbose mode2/3 E Verbose mode2/3 E (Host toDevice) SIS Command E E E E E E E E E E E X50) E X50) E E U2 U2 U1 U1 S2* S1* X1RCDR X1*0 X1*2RCDR X1*1RCDR X50) X50) * * * * 3 1 2 0 3 1 0 3 1 0 0 X50) X50) X50) X50) X50) X50) STRC * = Internal +SecondaryRecording =Internal inCompositemode =ConfidenceChannelA =Archive ChannelA,2=Archive Channel B (Available forDualChannelmodeonly), =ConfidenceChannelA =Archive ChannelA,2=Archive ChannelB(Available forDual Channelmodeonly), =ChannelAdisabled, =Disabled/unassigned/off/unmuted (default), =ConfidenceChannelA =Archive ChannlelA,2=Archive Channel B(Available forDualChannelmodeonly), =Disabled/unassigned/off/unmuted (default), =Offline,

RTMP * RCDR X( X( RTMP

} RTMP * RTMP * RTMP STRC RTMP X56^ X56^ } } } } }

1 } } } } } RTMP RTMP =Live } } }

1 =SingleRecording inCompositemode

RtmpS2* X*] RtmpS1* X*] (Device toHost) Response X56^] X58@ ] Rcdr Rcdr Rcdr X(] RtmpE RtmpU2 X56^] RtmpU1 X(] Strc SMP 300Series •RemoteCommunication andControl

X50) X1*0 X1*2 X1*1 X50) * * X50) X50) X50) X50) * ] ] ] * X(]

X(] * * * * X*] X*] X56^] X56^] 1 1 =Enabled/assigned/on/muted =Enabled/assigned/on/muted

status. stream backupRTMP View status. stream primaryRTMP View Additional Description View status. View Disable recording. orexternal). (internal Enable secondaryrecording or external). Enable singlerecording (internal stream push statusofRTMP View stream push Enable ordisableRTMP X50) backuppublishURLof View X50) Enter backuppublishURLof X50) primarypublishURLof View X50) Enter primarypublishURLof Enable ordisableeachstream. . . . .

X50) X50)

. . 121

Dual ChannelHDMIOutput Composite/Dual ChannelEncoderMode Encoder Profile Recording Profiles Delayed Recording Startfor Enable/Disable Archive Recording (DualChannelmode) Command Function KEY: KEY: KEY: KEY: KEY: KEY: Query HDMIoutput Set HDMIoutput mode selectedencoding View mode Set archive encoding outputmode View Set outputmode profileView Set profile Delete recording profile selectedprofileView Query activeprofile Recall recording profile countdown recordingView start delayduration View Delay duration chBrecordView status Set archive channelB status channelArecordView Set archive channelA

X6$ X50# X50) X4! X4) X52( X53) X59# X( =On/Off =Outputmode =Encodeprofile =HDMIoutput =Jsonstringofrecording profile parameters(forexample:[“id”:1,”name”;”RECORDPROFILE01”,“contributor”:”Contributor1”, =Presets =Stream selection =Encodingmode =Delaydurationinseconds

1 “coverage”;”Coverage1”, Presentor1....}) to (Host toDevice) SIS Command E E E E E E E X50) E X50) E E E E Example E E E E E E Ad hoc 32 1 1* X5* V5*

L5PRST OMOD X6$ 1ENCM R5* 1* PRCDR P X2RCDR X2* X1RCDR X1* (twodigitresponse —

SMOD X59# X4! X50#

0 0 3 1 1 1 0 OMOD X53) X53) X53) X( X( * =ConfidenceChannelA =Archive ChannelA,2=Archive ChannelB(Available forDualChannelmodeonly) andaudio, =Video =Base, =ChannelAfullscreen, =Compositemode, =Disabled/unassigned/off/unmuted (default), EPRO } X4)

SMOD RCDR } RCDR RCDR } ENCM }

} } } PRST PRST

PRST }

EPRO } } }

5 2 } } }

to =Main, } } } } 60 seconds(default= 0 3 2 padding) =High = Video only =Video 1 =DualChannelmode 1 (Device toHost) Response =ChannelBfullscreen, RecStart10 ... X6$ ] Omod X50#] Encm 1* X4!] Smod1* X4)] Epro PrstX5* PrstV5* PrstR5* RecStart12, RecStart X59#] Rcdr X(] Rcdr X(] Rcdr PrstL5*

SMP 300Series •RemoteCommunication andControl X50)

X6$] P X2* X1*

X59#] X4!] 10 X50#] X53)] X52(] X53)] X53)] * X(] X(] ). X59#] X4)]

RecStart11, 1 =Enabled/assigned/on/muted 2 =Confidencelayout Additional Description recording startcountdown. Unsolicited response todisplay Set HDMIoutputto Archive. encodingmodefor View Archive. Select encodingmodefor outputmode View Set outputmodeto encodeprofileView Set encodeprofile to Query originalsetting. X59# Delay adhocrecording startfor View channelBrecordView status. Set archive channelB. channelArecordView status. Set archive channelA. seconds.

X4! X6$ X4) X4! X4) . . . . .

122

Bit RateControl Record ResolutionandFrameRate Video BitRate Group ofPictures (GOP)Length Audio BitRate HDMI AudioMute HDMI VideoMute Command Function KEY: KEY: KEY: KEY: composite modeonly) info Vie composite modeonly) and framerate(For recordView resolution recordView framerate Set record framerate recordView resolution Set record resolution GOPlength View Set videobitrate type bitratecontrolView Set bitratecontrol type Set GOPlength audiobitrate View Set audiobitrate videobitrate View status View Unmute HDMIaudio Mute HDMIaudio status View Disable blanking Enable blanking

w current recording

rmation (For X4^ X4# X54# X50@ X50! X50) X4& X4% X50) X4$ X4# X4@ X( =On/Off =Record resolution =Audiobitrate =Bitratecontrol type =Record framerate

= Video bitrate =Video = Video bitrate =Video = GOPlength =Outputchannel =Inputnumber =Stream selection =Stream selection =Filesize

(Host toDevice) SIS Command E E E E X50) E E E Verbose mode2/3 1*I Example 33I E E X50) E E E 99Z 99* 99* 99B 99* 99*

X50) X50) X50) X50) V X50) X50) A A V

0Z 1Z 0B 1B X50) X50) X50) X50) File sizeinmegaBytes 1 1 1 1 480p 00200 1 1 80 00200 0 0 * BRCT * * * = to =Archive ChannelA,2=Archive ChannelB(Dualmodeonly), = to =Archive ChannelA,2=Archive Channel B (DualChannelmodeonly), =VBR(default), =Disabled/unassigned/off/unmuted (default), VRES VFRM GOPL BITR * BITR *

, X4& X4^ X4@ X4% A 30 96

X4# X4$ 5 30 , ,

2 , 720p , to to

VRES BRCT VFRM GOPL } } } } = 2 128

BITR BITR } } = 10000 10000 B

25 , , 192 1080p } } } } , } } 3 (5-digitresponse) (5-digitresponse) = , 1 256 =CVBR, 24 , 512x288,1024x768,1280x1024, Custom , , 4 320 = (Device toHost) Response BitrV X4@ ] Brct Inf*

=CBR SMP 300Series •RemoteCommunication andControl , 5 = X50)

X50) X50)

720*30 12.5 ] ] ] ]

* *ChB * * * X50@ * X4@] * X4&] X4^] X4%]

, X4#] X4$] 6 =

] *ChB X50! 1 12 =Enabled/assigned/on/muted ,

x 7 >*< X50!

Vert = 10 X4^ >*< ,

8 resolution*Frame >*< = X4^ 5

X4&

>*< >*< X4& Additional Description Set videobitrateto Set bitratecontrol typeto View theaudiomutestatus. View Unmute HDMIaudiooutput. Mute HDMIaudiooutput. thevideomutestatus. View Displays HDMIvideooutput. Blanks HDMIvideooutput. Set GOPlengthto Set audiobitrateto 3 3 X54# =ConfidenceChannelA =ConfidenceChannelA >*< >*< X54# X4#

>*< rate > ] X4# ] X4% > X4# X4$ ] . . .

X4@ . 123

Safely EjectUSBStorage HDCP Settings(HDMIInputsonly) Test Pattern Overscan Mode Advanced Configuration Preview OutputRefresh Rate Recording ThumbnailSize Command Function KEY: KEY: KEY: KEY: KEY: KEY: Eject USBstorage HDCPnotification View notification Disable HDCP notification Enable HDCP authorization inputHDCP View authorization off Set inputHDCP authorization on Set inputHDCP inputHDCPstatus View testpattern View Set testpattern overscanmode View Set overscanmode outputrefreshView rate refresh rate Set preview output size recordingView thumbnail Set thumbnailsize

X59! X51@ X51! X50! X( X56% X51) X50$ X4* X54% =On/off =Outputrefresh rate =HDCPnotification =HDCPstatus =Inputnumber =Overscan =Inputvideoformat =Thumbnailsize =EjectUSBstorage =Test patterns

(Host toDevice) SIS Command E X59! E E E E E E E E E X56% E X50$ E X50$ E E E E NHDCP N0HDCP N1HDCP E E0* E1* I RATE X4* TRCDR T TEST X50! X50! X54%

0 0 0 1 0 5 0 0 1 0 1 = YUVp/HDTV (default), 2 = YUVi, 3=Composite 1 =YUVp/HDTV(default),2YUVi, RATE X50! X50! * =Crop, 6=Pulse, = to =AllUSBstorage, =Off (muteoutputtoblack), =Nosink/source detected, =Disabled/unassigned/off/unmuted (default), =Off (default), = =Normal(default), OSCN USBE TEST } } X51)

HDCP HDCP RCDR } } 60 0% 5 } }

HDCP HDCP } Hz(default), } } } (default: HDMIinputs), OSCN } } }

} } } 1 =Colorbars, 2 7 1 2 =5 = Timestamp (compositemodeonly),8=UniversalOSDonly) =Timestamp =Followsarchive resolution =USBFront, 0 Hz (Device toHost) Response X51)] Oscn X4* ] Rate X54% ] RcdrT USBE X51@] HdcpN0 HdcpN1 X(] HdcpE HdcpE X51!] X56%] Test 1 1 1 =HDCPdetected, SMP 300Series •RemoteCommunication andControl =On(green HDCPnotification-screen, default) = 2 =Aspectratio X50$ X59!] X56%] X4* ] 2

X50! X50! 3 X54% ] . 5% ] ] =USBRear, * (default:YUVpinput), X51)] *0 *1

] ] 1 =Enabled/assigned/on/muted 1.33 4

2 =USBRCP =Sink/source detectedbutnoHDCP , 3 =Aspectratio 2 = 5 . 0% Additional Description for inputtype thecurrentView overscan overscan mode Sets inputtype notification Disable green screen HDCP notification (default) Enable green screen HDCP off forinput Turn HDCPauthorizeddevice on forinput Turn HDCPauthorizeddevice (default: YUVi andcompositeinputs) (default: YUVi 1.78 , 4

=Aspectratio X50! X50! X50$ X50$

X51)

(default) . to . 1.85 , X51)

124

Audio Level Audio Mute Audio Delay Audio InputFormat Audio Background Image(forcompositemodeonly) Command Function KEY: KEY: NOTE: KEY: NOTE: KEY: View inputaudiolevel View Set inputaudiolevel mute status audiochannel View Mute audiochannel Unmute audiochannel View Set audiodelay View Set audioformat image Mute background filename backgroundView filename Select background only), only),

Example Example

X50& X50^ X50^ X( X56$ X3) X! The audiooutputmutesettingappliestothestream, recording, andconfidence. Set theaudiodelaytozero todisableit. = =Audioinput =Audioformat =Audioselection =Audioselection =Audiolevel =Audiodelay

000 (Host toDevice) SIS Command E E E E E E E E E E E E E E to G G G G M M M 1 1* I I 0RF RF filename 999 X50^ X50^ X50^ X50^ X50^ X! X! 40000AU 40000*100AU ADLY X56$ } 40006 40003 40000 40006 40003 40000 0 0 1 Audio levelin } *

AFMT ms(default to =Disabled/unassigned/off/unmuted (default), =Disableaudio, X3) * *1AU *0AU AU AU } X50& 4 ADLY RF 60001 60001 , } } =DigitalinputB(Left), =DigitalinputA(Right), =DigitalinputB(Left), =DigitalinputA(Right), =AnalogInputA(Left), =AnalogInputA(Left), AFMT 1 } to } } } } AU

} 5 =Output(Right,foraudiomutecontrol only) =Output(Right,foraudiomutecontrol only) } forSDImodels 0 0.1 } ms,3-digitresponse) } dBsteps(- 1 =Analog(defaultforinput3), (Device toHost) Response 100 X50&] DsG40000*100 DsG X(] DsM X56$] Adly1* DsM X3)] Afmt Imr0 "filename" Imr

180 40007 40007 40001 40001 SMP 300Series •RemoteCommunication andControl 40004 40004 X50^ X50^ X50^

] filename to X! ] 240 =DigitalinputB(Right),6 =DigitalinputB(Right),6

* X56$ ] =AnalogInputA(Right), =AnalogInputA(Right), * *1 *0 =AnalogInputB(Left), =AnalogInputB(Left),

X3) ] X50&] ] =- ] ]

] 18.0 ] 1 =Enabled/assigned/on/muted 2 to+ =LPCM2CH(default) 24.0

dB) 40005 40005 0000 0000 40002 40002 =Output(Left,foraudiomutecontrol =Output(Left,foraudiomutecontrol =AnalogInputB(Right =AnalogInputB(Right =DigitalinputA(Left) =DigitalinputA(Left) Additional Description to +10 dB Analog audioinputA(left)isset level inputaudiochannel View +10 dB Set analogaudioinputA(left)to level Set audioinputchannel View audiodelayvalue. View Unmute audiochannel Mute audiochannel X50& X50&

. .

X50^ X50^ X50^ . X50^ . to

125

EDID Minder Import/Remove Certificate Horizontal VideoMirroring Delete Recording EventandFilesbyDB_ID Command Function KEY: NOTE: KEY: KEY: format Export EDIDinbinary location Import EDIDtouser EDIDassignment View input Assign EDIDtospecific currentView certificate certificate Delete user (If passphraseneeded) Import certificate Import certificate setting View input Disable mirroring per input Enable mirroring per and file Delete recording event

X50! X6* X6& X! X59@ A custom(user -supplied =Inputs =EDIDnumber =EDIDUserloadedslots =Inputnumber =Deleterecording byDB_ID -supplied) certificatewillberemoved by

(Host toDevice) SIS Command EDID E EDID E E E Verbose mode2/3 E E * E CERT E E E E E E I A V1 X1 I1 I1

A I I I Z

X6* X6& X50! X50! } } } X! X! X! X59@

CERT CERT * * ROTA *0ROTA *4ROTA ,[filename] ,[filename] EDID * RCDR X6* } } } EDID } } 1 1 1, 2,and4 Valid DB_IDnumber(integer) See } }

to through CERT

Table 1.EDIDValues 5 } } 4

( 1 through E (Device toHost) Response EdidE EdidI X6* ] EdidA CertX1 CertI1 CertI1 RotaI RotaI CertV1{“C”;“US”,...} {“C”;“US”,...} RotaI RcdrZ

ZQQQ SMP 300Series •RemoteCommunication andControl 5 forSDImodel) (mode5)reset andtheSMPwillrevert totheoriginalcertificate. X6*

X59@] X6&] X50! X!] X! X! ] ] ] onthenextpage *0 *4

] *

] ] X6*

] ]

] Additional Description 128 or256bytesofbinarydata. EDID fileisa.binfile,carrying carry afullpathname.The X6* EDID filefrom EDIDlocation Export a128or256-Bytebinary EDID location[1to3]. EDID filetotheuserloaded Import a128or256-Bytebinary JSON format Multiple informationfieldsina View mirroringView setting. Turn off mirroring forinput Turn onmirroring forinput . [filename]canoptionally X! X! . . 126

* 32 X6* 40 30 20 10 31 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 41 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 Default Table 1. 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 * User LoadedSlot3 User LoadedSlot2 User LoadedSlot1

EDID Values 1920 x1200 1680 x1050 1600 x1200 1400 x1050 1280 x1024 1920 x1200 1920 x1080 1680 x1050 1600 x1200 1400 x1050 1280 x1024 Resolution 1600 x900 1440 x900 1366 x768 1360 x768 1280 x800 1280 x768 1024 x768 1600 x900 1440 x900 1366 x768 1360 x768 1280 x800 1280 x768 1280 x720 1024 x768 800 x600 800 x600 1080p 1080p 1080p 1080p 1080i 1080i 720p 720p 576p 480p Refresh 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 24 Hz 50 Hz 25 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz SMP 300Series •RemoteCommunication andControl Rate Type HDTV HDTV HDTV HDTV HDTV HDTV HDTV HDTV HDTV HDTV PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC Video Format Video

HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI

DVI DVI DVI DVI DVI DVI DVI DVI DVI DVI DVI DVI DVI DVI DVI Audio 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch 2-Ch N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 127 Reference Information

This section provides information about: • Mounting the SMP 300 Series • Supported File Types, Drive Formats, Browsers, and Browser Plugins • DataViewer • Streaming Method Overview • Estimating Storage Requirements for a Recording • Front Panel Menu Diagrams • Front Panel Menu Diagrams (Record/Stream Configuration)

Mounting the SMP 300 Series The 1U high, full rack width, 11.5 inch deep SMP 300 Series Streaming Media Decoder can be: • Set on a table • Mounted on a rack shelf • Mounted under a desk or tabletop • Mounted on a projector bracket See the SMP 300 Series product page at www.extron.com for compatible mounting kits.

Tabletop Use The SMP 300 Series includes rubber feet (not installed). For tabletop use, attach a self‑adhesive rubber foot to each corner on the bottom of the unit.

Furniture Mounting Furniture mount the SMP 300 Series using an optional under‑desk or through‑desk mounting kit. Follow the instructions included with the mounting kit.

Table or Wall Mounting Extron table or wall mounting brackets extend approximately 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) above the top surface of the SMP 300 Series enclosure. This design allows an air space between the mounting surface and the enclosure. Follow the instructions included with the mounting kit.

Rack Mounting For rack mounting using the included rack mounts, do not install the rubber feet. Mount the SMP 300 Series on a 19 inch universal or basic rack shelf.

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 128 UL Rack Mounting Guidelines The following Underwriters Laboratories (UL) guidelines pertain to the safe installation of the SMP 300 Series in a rack. 1. Elevated operating ambient temperature — If the unit installed in a closed or multi- unit rack assembly, the operating ambient temperature of the rack environment can be greater than room ambient temperature. Therefore, install the unit in an environment compatible with the maximum ambient temperature (Tma = +122 °F, +50 °C) specified by Extron. 2. Reduced air flow — Install the equipment in a rack so that the amount of air flow required for safe operation of the equipment is not compromised. 3. Mechanical loading — Mount the equipment in the rack so that uneven mechanical loading does not produce a hazardous condition. 4. Circuit overloading — Connect the equipment to the supply circuit and consider the effect that circuit overloading might have on overcurrent protection and supply wiring. Appropriate consideration of equipment nameplate ratings should be used when addressing this concern. 5. Reliable earthing (grounding) — Maintain reliable grounding of rack-mounted equipment. Pay particular attention to supply connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit (for example use of power strips).

Supported File Types, Drive Formats, Browsers, and Browser Plugins

File Formats The SMP 300 Series creates *.m4v and mp4 video and m4a audio files, and *.jpg thumbnail and chapter marker images. They use still image files for background material. Optional fonts can be used for on-screen displays.

Recording File Types • mp4 (as m4v), m4a

Still Image File Types • png (for background images) • jpg (for SMP-created thumbnails and chapter markers)

Font File Types • TrueType™ (.ttf) • OpenType® (.otf)

NOTE: To upload a font file, use the file upload utility within the File Management page. The user is responsible for obtaining any necessary font licenses before uploading fonts to the SMP.

Drive Formats The SMP 300 Series supports FAT32, NTFS, and VFAT long file names, EXT2, EXT3 and EXT4 formats for USB drives that are used for file storage.

NOTE: For FAT32 USB storage, file sizes must be limited to 4 GB or the recording creates multiple 4 GB files. FAT32 internal recording does not have the 4 GB size limit, if unlimited file size is selected.

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 129 Browsers In order to view the SMP 300 Series embedded web pages, use one of the supported web browsers (and versions) listed below.

NOTE: The preview video in the AV Controls panel of the SMP uses an HTML5 player and is not supported by Microsoft Internet Explorer v.11, Microsoft Edge, or Apple Safari. To see a preview of the current stream either: • Use a different browser or • Open a standalone, third-party video player (such as VideoLAN opensource VLC media player) and connect to the stream from the SMP.

• Google Chrome version 48 or higher • Mozilla Firefox version 44 or higher • Microsoft Edge • Microsoft Internet Explorer version 11 or higher (for Windows operating systems)

NOTE: If you are using Internet Explorer, compatibility mode must be turned off (see Turning Off Compatibility Mode on page 50).

• Apple Safari version 9 or higher (for macOS operating systems)

NOTE: Safari is the preferred browser for macOS operating systems.

Browser Plugins Supported web browser streaming player plugins for use with the embedded web pages include the following: • Extron Streaming Media Player (SMP) for Windows • VideoLAN VLC • Apple QuickTime

DataViewer DataViewer is an enhanced terminal emulation program that facilitates analysis of RS-232, USB, and TCP/IP communication with Extron devices. The software allows users to send commands to a device and view the responses in ASCII or hexadecimal format. Command and response logs can be saved in text or HTML format. DataViewer is available at www.extron.com. Download the installation file and load the program on the PC connected to the SMP 300 Series.

Start the DataViewer program 1. Click the desktop icon. 2. The Communications Setup dialog box opens. Select a Communication tab. a. Select the Comm Port (RS-232) tab (see figure 91, 1 on the next page) if using the rear panel RS-232 port. b. Select the TCP/IP tab (2) if using a network connection. c. Select the USB tab (3) if using the front panel config port.

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 130 91 1 2 3

Extron USB Device

Figure 91. Communications Dialogs 3. Select the startup options: a. If RS-232 is selected, configure the port settings. b. If TCP/IP is selected, configure the IP address and Telnet port. Enter a password, if necessary. c. If USB is selected, choose Extron USB Device in the drop-down window.

NOTE: To automatically connect to the SMP 300 Series, select Connect on startup.

4. Click OK to connect to the SMP 300 Series and start using the program. You are now ready to begin entering commands. Open the DataViewer Help file from the toolbar for more information on the program.

Sending commands using a TCP/IP connection 1. Configure the network settings of a control PC so that it can be connected to the same network as the SMP 300 Series. Use an RJ-45 cable to connect the control PC to the network. 2. Start the DataViewer program (see Start the DataViewer program on the previous page) and follow the steps to connect to the SMP 300 Series via TCP/IP. 3. On the Communication Setup window (see figure 91): 1. Select the TCP/IP tab. 2. Enter the IP address of the SMP 300 Series into the Hostname/IP Address field. 3. In the Telnet Port field, enter the port number for the connection.

NOTE: The default telnet port to send SIS commands to the SMP 300 Series is port 23.

4. Click OK. The Communication Setup dialog closes.

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 131 The main DataViewer dialog opens and the SMP 300 Series responds with a copyright statement containing the model number, part number, and current firmware version of the connected SMP 300 Series, along with the date (see figure 92, 2). 92

1 2

3 4

Figure 92. Enter Commands and View Responses 5. Use the Commands field to enter SIS commands (1). View the responses in the Responses field (2). For example, enter 1I, the command to display the model name, in the Commands field (3). The Responses field (4) returns the model name and number of the connected device.

What is an IP Address? A full explanation of IP addressing is beyond the scope of this user guide. However, the following information is enough to get started. An IP address is a 32-bit binary number that is used to identify each device on an Ethernet network. This number is usually represented by four decimal numbers (each in the range 0 to 255) separated by dots, (for example, 198.123.34.240). This is called "dotted decimal notation". An IP address is divided into two parts: • The network identifier • The host identifier On a given network, each address must have the same network identifier value, but have a unique host identifier. There are, therefore, different classes of addresses that define: • The range of valid addresses. • The parts of the address used to identify the network and host. The most common IP address classes are: Class Valid Address Range Identifier Arrangement Class A 0.0.0.1 to 127.255.255.254 NNN.HHH.HHH.HHH Class B 128.0.0.1 through 191.255.255.254 NNN.NNN.HHH.HHH Class C 192.0.0.1 through 223.255.255.254 NNN.NNN.NNN.HHH

NOTES: • NNN = Network identifier • HHH = Host identifier

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 132 Private and Public Address Ranges Within each of the classes are a range of addresses designated as "private" addresses. These are addresses that should only be used on private local networks and intranets and cannot be accessed directly from the Internet. • 10.0.0.0 – 10.255.255.255 • 172.16.0.0 – 172.31.255.255 • 169.254.0.0 – 169.254.255.255 • 192.168.0.0 – 192.168.255.255 Addresses outside these ranges are considered "public".

Multicast Address Range A further range of addresses is available for private multicast domain use: • 239.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 These addresses (also known as class D addresses) are used to allow several devices to be part of the same multicast group. Each device in the group has the same multicast address and can effectively send data to all other devices in the same group simultaneously. The SMP uses 239.199.188.138 as the default multicast address for the archive stream and 239.199.188.142 as the confidence stream default.

Subnet Mask The subnet mask is a 32-bit binary number used to "mask" certain bits of the IP address. It extends the number of network options available for the IP address. The subnet mask does this by allowing part of the host identifier to be used as a subnetwork identifier. It is important that the correct value is used for the subnet mask. The value of the subnet mask is dependent on the IP address class being used. Use the table below and the table in the What is an IP Address? section on the previous page to select the subnet mask class that matches the IP address class. Class Subnet Mask Class A 255.0.0.0 Class B 255.255.0.0 Class C 255.255.255.0

Port Number A port number is combined with the IP address to create an application‑specific or process‑specific address. The port number can uniquely identify an application or process on a computer and thereby enable the computer to share a single Ethernet connection for multiple requirements. A port number is always associated with the IP address of the computer, as well as the type of protocol used for network communication. The SMP uses specific ports, but can be configured to meet most requirements. In addition to the default ports, any port in the available range (1024 to 65535) can be used.

NOTE: Ports previously assigned and currently in use by the SMP cannot be used again.

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 133 All streaming methods (except TS/UDP push) use multiple port numbers. The following table shows the number of ports used by each streaming method. Archive and confidence streams have different port numbers. RTSP (Pull) TS/UDP TS/RTP ES/RTP (Push) (Push) (Push) Unicast (per stream) 4* 1 2 4* Multicast 4* 1 2 4* * 4 ports for "Audio/Video", or 2 ports for "Video only" When the SMP 300 Series ports are configured, only the initial port is entered by the user. The SMP 300 Series firmware then assigns the multiple port numbers based on the initial port number.

Choosing an IP Address If the SMP 300 Series and other devices are connected via an independent network, then follow the guidelines below when choosing IP addresses. However, if the SMP 300 Series and other devices are being connected to an existing network, advise the network administrator and ask them to assign suitable addresses. On an independent network, nearly any type of address can be used (in theory). However, it is generally recommended that class C addresses are used (192.0.0.1 through 223.255.255.255). There are two rules for choosing IP addresses: • The network identifier must be the same for each address. • The host identifier must be unique for each address. Applying these rules to class C addresses, the first three decimal values of the IP addresses must all be the same, while the last value is used to uniquely identify each device. The table below shows an example of a valid class C addressing scheme. Device IP Address Subnet Mask Device 1 208.132.180.41 255.255.255.0 Device 2 208.132.180.42 255.255.255.0 Device 3 208.132.180.43 255.255.255.0

NOTE: The host identifiers (41, 42, and 43 in the example above) do not need to be sequential or in any particular order. However, it is recommended that the numbers are grouped for simplicity.

The table below shows an example of an invalid class C addressing scheme. Device IP Address Subnet Mask Device 1 208.132.180.41 255.255.255.0 Device 2 192.157.180.42 255.255.255.0 Device 3 208.132.180.41 255.255.255.0

Assuming the IP address for device 1 is valid, the IP address for device 2 is invalid because the network identifier for each address must begin with 208.132.180.xxx. The IP address for device 3 is invalid because it is using the same IP address as device 1. The ping command can be used from a computer (see Using the Ping Utility to Test Communications on the next page) or from the web interface to ensure that a device at an IP address is responding correctly.

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 134 Using the Ping Utility to Test Communications Use the ping command to test communications between a Windows-based computer and another device on the same network. 1. From the desktop, select Start > Run. 2. The Run dialog box displays. In the Open field, enter ping nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn –t (where nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is the IP address of the device to test). 3. Click OK or press the key. A window opens showing a series of response messages (explained below). 4. To stop the ping utility, press on the keyboard.

NOTE: The embedded web page includes a ping utility (see Diagnostic Tools on page 95).

Response Messages While running the ping utility, a series of response messages are displayed to determine the status of the communications link. For example, pinging a device with the IP address 208.132.180.48 replies with a message similar to the following: Reply from 208.132.180.48: bytes=32 time=2ms TTL=32 This is the correct response indicating that the device at the specified address is communicating correctly. The response time value may vary according to network traffic. If one of the following messages are received: • Request timed out — There has been no response from the specified address. Either the processor is not receiving data (from the computer) or is not sending data back. Check that the device is powered on and set to the same address that was pinged. Also, check that the device is correctly connected to the network. • Reply from 208.132.180.48: Destination host unreachable — The IP address of the computer is not in the same class as the device being pinged. Check that the subnet mask on both the computer and the device are set to the same value. Also check that both IP addresses are within the correct range for the chosen class and are compatible (see Subnet Mask on page 133 and What is an IP Address? on page 132 to select the subnet mask class that matches the IP address class).

Multicast IP Addressing for Multiple SMP 300 Series Installations When multiple SMP 300 Series devices are installed in a system (when the multicast address is used for push or pull streaming) the streams are managed by the SMP 300 Series to avoid conflicts.

Pull streaming (RTSP) The SMP 300 Series can use one of two multicast streaming IP address assignment methods. If multicast IP addresses for a network are limited, the various SMP 300 Series devices can each use unassigned port numbers within the available range (1024 to 65535).

NOTE: To prevent conflicts, always check to see if other devices using the same IP address have already used a port number before using it in the SMP 300 Series.

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 135 The following table shows a typical port assignment for multiple SMP 300 Series devices using a single multicast IP address (RTSP pull streams require four sequential ports). Device SMP IP Multicast IP Multicast Port SMP1 192.168.254.10 239.199.188.138 12340 to 12343 SMP2 192.168.254.11 239.199.188.138 12344 to 12347 SMP3 192.168.254.12 239.199.188.138 12348 to 12351

When there are different multicast IP addresses available, there is no need for multiple port numbers and the port number can remain at the default (12340) as shown in the next table. Device SMP IP Multicast IP Multicast Port SMP1 192.168.254.10 239.199.188.138 12340 SMP2 192.168.254.11 239.199.188.139 12340 SMP3 192.168.254.12 239.199.188.140 12340

NOTE: The SMP 300 Series automatically inserts the ending port number when the initial port number is entered.

Push streaming (TS/UDP, TS/RTP, ES/RTP) Push streams to a multicast address generally require only two ports, except for ES/RTP which requires four. When push streaming from multiple SMP 300 Series devices to multicast addresses, the same IP address rules apply as with pull streaming. For push streaming, the destination IP and port number are adjusted using the encoder presets page.

Streaming Method Overview The streaming method used by the SMP 300 Series should be considered carefully. Multicast is typically used for live multicasting a "one-to-many" session when it is known there are multiple viewers of a stream. Unicast streaming is used for on-demand video where the network infrastructure does not support multicast traffic. Typically, unicast streaming is used for a point-to-point (one-to-one) connection.

Protocols Used for Streaming Streaming protocols must be selected based on the streaming method and the SMP 300 Series capability. The following transport layer protocols can be used for SMP streaming. Pull Push Unicast Multicast Unicast Multicast RTP (RTP over UDP) RTP (RTP over UDP) TS/UDP TS/UDP TS/RTP TS/RTP ES/RTP (Native RTP) ES/RTP (Native RTP) The transport protocols are summarized in this section. For information on how to change the SMP 300 Series transport protocol, see Streaming on page 34.

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 136 Multicast Streaming Method — An Overview This streaming method is used for live video multicasting with low latency in a "one‑to‑many" streaming session. The SMP 300 Series uses a variety of streaming protocols to send data to a multicast group. Using multicasting, the SMP 300 Series does not need to know the IP address of the devices viewing the stream. This allows a large number of users to view the data simultaneously while using bandwidth efficiently. The maximum number of connected users is dependent on the type of distribution network used.

NOTE: To use this streaming method, each network must be configured to pass multicast broadcasts.

Multicast streaming can use push or pull streaming. It can push the data to a network for broader distribution, or to many individual viewing devices. It can also use pull streaming, where the SMP 300 Series waits for viewing devices to request the stream before broadcasting. 93 Streaming Streaming Protocol Protocol SMP 300 Series NETWORK Viewing (encoder) device SMP 300 Series sends data Streaming to a multicast group. Protocol Viewing device

Streaming Protocol Viewing device

Streaming Protocol Viewing device

Streaming Protocol Additional devices Multiple devices can be part of the multicast group. Figure 93. Multicast Streaming

NOTE: IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) multicast protocol is used by routers and switches to deliver streams to subscribing endpoints. The SMP 300 Series delivers packets and frames onto the network that are identified as multicast. An IGMP multicast conserves network bandwidth because the SMP 300 Series only sends data when a connection is made by a user. All network switches and routing equipment must be properly configured to support IGMP snooping and IGMP query to avoid flooding all endpoints with unnecessary streaming traffic.

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 137 Unicast Streaming Method — An Overview This streaming method is used for on-demand video with low latency and uses a variety of streaming protocols. It can be used where the network infrastructure does not support multicast traffic. Typically, unicast streaming is used for a point-to-point (one-to-one) connection (SMP 300 Series to single viewing device), but can be configured to use multiple active connections. Unicast streaming can use push or pull streaming. It can push the data to individual or multiple viewing devices, or it can use pull steaming, where the SMP 300 Series waits for an individual viewing device to request the stream before broadcasting. 94

1 to n Device 1 SMP 300 Series NETWORK Viewing (encoder) device SMP 300 Series sends data to specified devices. Device 2 Viewing device

Device 3 Viewing device

Device n Viewing device

Figure 94. Unicast Streaming

NOTES: • When unicast streaming, the SMP 300 Series sends an individual stream to each viewing device. This means that the total bandwidth increases as the number of actively connected viewing devices increases and the total bandwidth decreases as the number of actively connected viewing devices decreases. • In the figure above, n represents an unspecified number of additional streams.

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 138 Streaming Playback Methods Streams from the SMP 300 Series can be viewed using various playback methods.

NOTE: The procedures presented in the following sections use a and version 2.0.2 of VLC media player. These procedures may vary when a different operating system is used or when different versions of the VLC media player are used.

The following streaming playback methods are discussed: • Push and Pull Streaming • Playing a Push or Pull Stream Using VLC Media Player®

Push and Pull Streaming The client computer or media player can either search the network for active streams (push streaming from the encoder) and select the desired video, or send a request to the encoder to begin streaming a video to it (pull streaming). 95 Push Streaming Viewers select an active stream from SMP 300 Series.

Stream Stream SMP 300 Series NETWORK Viewing (encoder) device #1 SMP 300 Series sends data Stream to all viewing devices Viewing whether a request is device #2 made or not. Stream Viewing device #3

Stream Viewing device #4

Stream Additional devices

Pull Streaming Viewer #1 and #3 request Request stream from SMP 300 Series.

Stream Stream SMP 300 Series NETWORK Viewing (encoder) device #1 SMP 300 Series sends stream to #1 and #3 viewing Viewing devices only when device #2 request is received. If no requests are received, Stream no stream is broadcast. Viewing device #3

Viewing device #4

Additional devices

Figure 95. Push and Pull Streaming

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 139 Push Stream and Pull Stream Playback URLs To verify a running stream, use the templates below to place the stream into the VLC "Open Network Stream" dialog (see step 5 of Playing a Pull Stream Using VLC Media Player on page 143). Substitute the SMP IP address for . Substitute the destination IP address and port number for :DESTINATION_PORT. Pull Stream URLs PULL Streaming: URL RTSP Unicast rtsp:/// (Archive Channel A) RTSP Unicast (Archive Channel B) rtsp:/// NOTE: This stream is available only on units that are set for dual encoding mode.

RTSP Unicast (Confidence) rtsp:/// RTSP Multicast rtsp:////multicast (Archive Channel A) or HTTP:///live/pull/multicast1.sdp RTSP Multicast rtsp:///stream name 2/multicast (Archive Channel B) or HTTP:///live/pull/multicast2.sdp

NOTE: This stream is available only on units that are set for dual encoding mode.

RTSP Multicast (Confidence) rtsp:////multicast or HTTP:///live/pull/multicast3.sdp

Push Stream URLs PUSH Streaming: Unicast (Destination IP must be set to the location where the stream is played) TS/UDP UDP://@:DESTINATION_PORT TS/RTP RTP://@:DESTINATION_PORT ES/RTP (Archive Channel A HTTP:///live/push/s1.sdp ES/RTP (Archive Channel B) HTTP:///live/push/s2.sdp

NOTE: This stream is available only on units that are set for dual encoding mode.

ES/RTP (confidence) HTTP:///live/push/s3.sdp Multicast (Destination IP must be multicast IP address) TS/UDP UDP://@:DESTINATION_PORT TS/RTP RTP://@:DESTINATION_PORT ES/RTP (Archive Channel A) HTTP:///live/push/s1.sdp ES/RTP (Archive Channel B) HTTP:///live/push/s2.sdp

NOTE: This stream is available only on units that are set for dual encoding mode.

ES/RTP (confidence) HTTP:///live/push/s3.sdp

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 140 NOTES: • is the IP address of the SMP 300 Series. • For push URLs, the Destination Port is the lowest port in the Port Range set from the web page. • UDP://@:DESTINATION_PORT default is UDP://@:12340. • Some dependencies may apply with certain versions of VLC. • For ES/RTP, SAP is available in Video only stream mode.

Streaming Capabilities and System Scalability The following tables detail the streaming capabilities of the SMP 300 Series. Data for the tables was obtained through laboratory testing using optimal bandwidth conditions and can vary depending on the selected video bit rate.

NOTE: Testing to determine the approximate maximum number of pull streams was done on the Archive encoder with one pull unicast confidence stream. Recording while streaming does not reduce the maximum number of pull streams.

Available Unicast Streams Video resolution and bit rate affect the total number of unicast streams (Archive and Confidence) the SMP 300 Series can broadcast. The following table compares the selected resolution and bit rate with the approximate number of unicast streams that are available. Changing the resolution or using higher or lower bit rates may increase or decrease the available number of streams.

Pull Stream Method Unicast Resolution Approximate Number of Video Bit Rate (Kbps) (Pixels x Lines @ frame rate) Pull Streams 848 x 480 @ 15 1500 40 1024 x 768 @ 15 2500 32 1280 x 1024 @ 30 3500 29 1280 x 720 @ 30 5000 23 1920 x 1080 @ 30 8000 16

NOTE: The following configuration options were set on the SMP: • Stream Type = VBR • GOP Length = 30 • Stream Mode = Video/Audio • Layout = Full screen with high motion content • Archive Pull Streaming Method = Unicast RTP • Confidence Pull Streaming Method = Unicast RTP at default setting

Push Stream Method The number of push unicast streams is one per encoder (the SMP 300 Series has two encoders, Archive and Confidence in composite mode and 3 encoders, Archive Channel A, Archive Channel B and confidence in dual channel mode).

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 141 Available Multicast Streams The SMP 300 Series uses the IGMP multicast protocol to push or pull streams. The IGMP multicast protocol provides increased bandwidth efficiency because the SMP 300 Series only sends data when a connection is made by the user. All network switches and routing equipment must be properly configured to support IGMP snooping and IGMP query to avoid flooding all endpoints with unnecessary streaming traffic. The table below indicates the approximate number of multicast streams supported by the SMP 300 Series using the IGMP multicast protocol. Operating at different resolutions using higher or lower bit rates can increase or decrease the scalability of the streaming system.

NOTE: For networks not configured to use the IGMP multicast protocol, consider using a media server to deliver multiple unicast streams to control PCs and viewing devices.

Pull Stream Method Multicast Resolution Recommended Approximate Number of (Pixels x Lines @ frame rate) Video Bit Rate Pull Streams (Kbps) 1920 x 1080 @ 30 8000 >180

NOTES: The number of available pull streams is dependent on bandwidth and content (high motion or static content). The following configuration options were set on the SMP: • Stream Type = VBR • GOP Length = 30 • Stream Mode = Video/Audio • Layout = Full screen with high motion content • Archive Pull Streaming Method = Multicast UDP • Confidence Pull Streaming Method = Unicast RTP at default settings

If more streams are required, setting up a media server is the next step in expanding the streaming architecture. A media server provides a scalable live streaming media solution.

Push Stream Method The number of multicast push streams is not limited.

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 142 Playing a Pull Stream Using VLC Media Player Use the following procedure to play and view an SMP 300 Series stream using the VLC media player. 1. If you know the stream URL, go to step 5. Otherwise, to obtain the stream URL, access the web-based user interface of the SMP 300 Series (see Accessing the Web-Based User Interface on page 51). NOTE: If no password is set, anyone can view the stream URL. If a password is set, you must be logged in to view the URL.

2. The Recording Controls page opens. In the Stream URL panel, if the archive and confidence streams are set to Pull ( see Push Stream and Pull Stream Playback URLs on page 140), the box displays the URL necessary to request a stream from the SMP 300 Series. Note the full URL in figure 96 for later reference. 96

Figure 96. Recording Controls 3. Run the VLC media player. The media player opens. 4. Select Media > Open Network Stream (see figure 97). 97

Figure 97. VLC Media Player — Open a Network Stream

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 143 5. The Open Network Media dialog box opens. Using the stream URL that was noted in step 2 on the previous page (rtsp://192.168.13.1/extron1), enter it into the Please enter a network URL: field (see figure 98, 1). 98

Figure 98. Enter Stream URL Information and Play 6. Click Play (2). After a few seconds, the media streaming from the SMP 300 Series plays on the VLC media player.

NOTE: The VLC media player image settings can now be changed if desired. For information on adjusting the image settings, see the VLC media player help file.

Playing a Push Stream Using Stream Announcement Protocol (SAP) In order to play a push stream, the VLC player uses SAP to identify streams: 1. Open VLC. From the View menu, select Playlist (see figure 99, 1). 99

Figure 99. VLC Playlist

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 144 2. From the left menu column, select Local Network (see figure 100, 2). 3. Select Network streams (SAP) (3). 100

Figure 100. Select Local Network Streams

4. VLC populates the playlist with all streams that contain SAP information. If a folder is shown, open it to view the SAP streams inside (see figure 101, 1). 101

Figure 101. VLC - Select a Stream

5. Either double-click the desired stream to begin playback, or single-click, then use the VLC player controls at the bottom of the window to view and control the stream.

NOTE: Depending on the announcement frequency, it may take several moments before the SAP streams appear.

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 145 Playing a Pull Stream Using QuickTime Media Player Use the following procedure to playback and view SMP 300 Series streams on the QuickTime player program. 1. If you know the stream URL, go to step 4. Otherwise, to obtain the stream URL, access the web-based user interface of the SMP 300 Series (see Web-Based User Interface on page 49). NOTE: If no password is set, anyone can view the stream URL. If a password is set, you must be logged in to view the URL.

2. The Recording Controls page opens (see figure 102). 102

Figure 102. Recording Controls Page

3. Note the Archive URL in the Stream URL panel. 4. Run QuickTime player. From the desktop, select Start > All Programs > QuickTime > QuickTime Player. 5. The QuickTime media player opens. From the File menu, select Open URL (see figure 103, 1). 103

1

Figure 103. QuickTime Player Menu — Open URL

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 146 The Open URL dialog opens (see figure 104). 6. In the Enter an Internet URL to open field, enter the stream URL that was noted in step 3 (1). 104

Enter an Internet URL to open: rtsp://192.168.13.1/extron1 1 2

Figure 104. Enter Stream URL Information 7. Click OK (2). After a few seconds, the media stream from the SMP 300 Series plays on the QuickTime player. If QuickTime player fails to play the stream: 1. From the QuickTime player menu, select Edit > Preferences > QuickTime Preferences. 2. Click the Advanced tab and select Safe mode (GDI only). 3. Click Apply, then OK to save the settings. 4. Close the player window and do this procedure again. The QuickTime player image settings can now be changed if desired.

NOTE: The QuickTime player does not display closed caption information.

Estimating Storage Requirements for a Recording

Estimating Storage per Recording Hour It is necessary to know the video and audio bit rates configured in the Extron SMP 300 Series. For these examples, the calculations assume that the bit rates remain constant during the recording; if you are using VBR (variable bit rate, which is the default) then the actual bit rates are often slightly lower than this estimate. In some cases they can be higher. To estimate storage per recording hour: 1. Find the SMP 300 Series video bit rate and audio bit rate, which are in kbps (kilobits per second). 2. Insert those bit rates into the following equation: [(video bit rate + audio bit rate) *3600 seconds per hour] / 8 bits per byte *1000 = x MBph (megabytes per hour) Example: Using the default 720p High encoder preset, with • Video bit rate = 5000 kbps • Audio bit rate = 192 kbps For a 1-hour recording (3600 seconds), • ([5000 + 192] * 3600) / 8000 = 2336.4 MBph or 2.34 GBph

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 147 For the default encoder presets of an SMP 300 Series, the following are the estimated storage requirements for each hour of recording: Estimated Storage Requirements Encoder Video bit rate Audio bit rate MB per hour GB per hour Preset (kbps) (kbps) 1080p High 8000 320 3744.0 3.74 1080p Low 6000 128 2757.6 2.76 720p High 5000 192 2336.4 2.34 720p Low 3000 128 1470.6 1.41 480p High 2500 128 1182.6 1.18 480p Low 1500 80 711.0 0.71 VGA High 3500 128 1632.6 1.63 VGA Low 2500 128 1182.6 1.18 SMP 300 Series 10,000 320 4644.0 4.64 max. rates SMP 300 Series 200 80 126.0 0.13 min. rates

NOTE: If several encoding rates are chosen, do the above calculation for each of the possible rates. Also, estimate how often each of the encoding rates is selected.

To estimate the number of hours of recordings that can be stored on a specific size of hard drive: • Determine the SMP 300 Series video bitrate and audio bitrate, in kbps (kilobits per second) • Insert those bitrates into the following equation: [(hard drive size in GB * 8,000,000) / (video bitrate +audio bitrate)]/3600 = x hours

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 148 Front Panel Menu Diagrams

(For Composite mode only) PICTURE RECORD/STREAM INPUT BACKGROUND ADVANCED VIEW COMM PRESETS MENU MENU MENU MENU MENU MENU MENU STATUS CONTROL CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION RECALL CONFIGURATION SETTINGS NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT Press and hold NEXT INPUT 5 + NEXT for 3 seconds. ARCHIVE ENCODER CHANNEL SELECT ENCODER ENCODER INPUT SELECT RECALL IN<1> AUTO IMAGE “Hidden” Menu* ALARM STATUS RECALL -OR- [NONE, HDCP, VIDEO...] [ON] <1> OFF EDIT COMM Rotate either to Rotate either to select a Rotate either to Rotate either to Rotate either to Rotate either to select. Rotate [ to select input. SETTINGS select a preset to recall. channel. select encoder type. select encoder type. select input. Press NEXT to load Rotate { to toggle on or off. the background file and exit. See the Record/Stream configuration ARCHIVE INPUT #[3] PREVIEW HDMI OUT [...FILENAME...] ARCHIVE ENCODER [A] H POSITION V (For Composite mode only) diagram on the following page. SERIAL PORT SAVE <1280X720@60Hz> +0000 +0000 9600 RS232 [ Rotate either to select Rotate to adjust Horizontal Rotate either to Rotate either to select a Rotate either to a preset # to save Position. select the input format. resolution. change baud rate. current settings to. Rotate { to adjust Vertical Position. DRIVE SPACE INT [FREE/TOTAL][GB] (3) H START V AUTO MEMORY MAC ADRESS IN<1> USER RECAL [A] H SIZE V (For Composite mode only) 005A6078CEC <640> <480> <128> <128> This is set at the factory and [ Rotate { to toggle Rotate [ to select an Rotate to adjust Horizontal Size. Rotate [ to select the horizontal cannot be changed. { Auto Memory input. Rotate to adjust Vertical Size. start pixel. (Skipped in “Edit” mode.) DRIVE SPACE [USB] Rotate { to select a preset. Rotate { to adjust the vertical On or Off. [FREE/TOTAL] [GB] start pixel. DHCP MODE On [A] BRIGHT CONTRAST (3) H ACTIVE V TEST PATTERN IN<1> USER SAVE <064> <064> <1024> <0768> Rotate either to toggle Rotate either to select a DHCP mode On or Off. SELECTED VOLNAME Rotate [ to select an Rotate [ to adjust Brightness. Rotate [ to adjust Horizontal Active pixel test pattern. [FREE/TOTAL][GB] input. Rotate { to adjust Contrast. width. Rotate { to select a preset. Rotate { to adjust Vertical Active pixel height. IP ADDR 192.168.254.254 RECORD DRIVE LIMITER [A] COLOR TINT (3) TTLPIX PHASE Rotate [ to select octet field. <064> <064> <16> Rotate { to change address. [ARCH] BR 5000kpbs MULTI TS/RTP Rotate [ to select Color. Rotate [ to adjust TTL pixel width. Rotate either to select Rotate { to select Tint. Rotate { to adjust phase. the drive restriction. SUBNET 255.255.000.000

Rotate either to change mask. ASPECT RATIO IN[1] RESET CONF BR 350 kpbs UNI RTP/UDP Rotate either to Rotate either to GATEWAY reboot or reset unit select an aspect ratio for the 000.000.000.000 configurations. selected input. Rotate [ to select octet field. Rotate { to change address. EDID INPUT #[1] <720p_60_2ch> The Input Configuration submenus are input Rotate [ to set an EDID value for the specific. Depending on the input type, not all active input. submenus (shown in gray on subsequent pages) are available. IN[1] AUDIO SELECT Rotate either to select an audio input source for the selected input.

IN[1] AUDIO LEVEL <0 dB> Rotate either to set the audio input level from -18 to +24 dB.

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 149 Front Panel Menu Diagrams (Record/Stream Configuration)

RECORD/STREAM Menu CONFIGURATION NEXT

ENCODER ENCODER Rotate either to Rotate either to select encoder select encoder NEXT ENCODER MODE ENCODER MODE STREAMING Rotate either to select mode. Rotate right for Dual mode. Rotate either to toggle streaming NEXT NEXT on or off. RECORDING RECORDING RECORDING RECORDING RECORDING NEXT STREAM METHOD STREAM METHOD Rotate either to Rotate either to -OR- select mode. select mode. Rotate either to NEXT NEXT NEXT select push or pull. RECORD TO 433.71 GB RECORD TO 71.75 GB INTERNAL NEXT NEXT Rotate to select auto, internal, or Display only. Rotate either to select protocol from external Record To location. STREAM PROTOCOL STREAM PROTOCOL STREAM PROTOCOL -OR- this list: NEXT UNI TS/UDP MULTI TS/UDP NEXT Rotate either to select protocol. UNI TS/RTP MULTI TS/RTP STREAMING 2ND REC TO X.XX GB Press NEXT to select and move UNI ES/RTP MULTI ES/RTP to next submenu. USBFRONT Press NEXT to select and move MULTICAST IP DESTINATION IP to next submenu. Rotate either to Rotate either to select among XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX toggle streaming multiple volumes on a drive. on or off. Rotate to select octet. Rotate to select octet. NEXT Rotate to change Rotate to change

STREAM METHOD STREAM METHOD NEXT NEXT -OR- Rotate either to select push or pull.

NEXT NEXT STREAM PROTOCOL STREAM PROTOCOL STREAM PROTOCOL Rotate either to select protocol from -OR- this list: UNI TS/UDP MULTI TS/UDP Rotate either to select protocol. UNI TS/RTP MULTI TS/RTP Press NEXT to select and move UNI ES/RTP MULTI ES/RTP to next submenu. Press NEXT to select and move to next submenu. MULTICAST IP DESTINATION IP XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX RESOLUTION Rotate to select octet. Rotate to select octet. <512x288> Rotate to change Rotate to change Rotate either to select streaming NEXT NEXT resolution. FRAME RATE OUTPUT MODE <15>

VID BITRATE AUD <5000> <320> Rotate to change video bitrate. Rotate to change audio bitrate.

SMP 300 Series • Reference Information 150 Glossary

Ad hoc recording — An ad hoc recording session is one that has been set up for a specific occasion or task without being previously scheduled. Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) — A standardized compression and encoding scheme for lossy (low quality) digital audio. Higher bit rates provide higher quality. Part of the MPEG- 2 and MPEG-4 specifications. The SMP 300 Series supports AAC-LC (MPEG-2 part 7, MPEG-4 part 3, sub-part 4 and part 14, MP4 audio). Advanced Video Coding (AVC) — Video compression format, H.264/MPEG-4 part 10 (see the H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC) definition on page 154). Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) — A protocol for assigning an IP address (see page 155) to a device based on the device MAC (Media Access Control) (see page 155) address or physical machine address, that maintains a table showing the correlation between the two. Archive stream or streams — The primary encoding streams are used to create recordings, and they can also be used for streaming. Archive streams are typically higher resolution than confidence streams. Aspect ratio control — The aspect ratio of the video output can be controlled by selecting a fill mode, which provides a full screen output, or a follow mode, which preserves the original aspect ratio of the input signal. Auto-Image — An Extron technology for scan converters and signal processors that simplifies setup by executing image sizing, centering, and filtering adjustments with a single button push. Auto Memory — Auto memory recalls input and image settings for signals that have previously been applied. If this feature is disabled, the device treats every newly applied input as a new source. B-frames — Bi-directionally predictive coded picture. Contains predictive, difference information from the preceding and following I- or P-frame within a GOP (see page 154). Data preceding or following the B-frame are required to recreate video information in a B-frame. They offer significantly better compression than I or P frames, but are not available in Baseline profile. Bandwidth — The total range of frequencies required to pass a specific signal without significant distortion or loss of data. In analog terms, the lower and upper frequency limits are defined as the half power, or -3 dB signal strength drop, compared to the signal strength of the middle frequency, or the maximum signal strength of any frequency, expressed as xx Hz to xx kHz (or MHz) @ -3 dB. In digital terms, it is the maximum bit rate at a specified error rate, expressed in bits per second (bps). The device bandwidth should be wider than the highest possible bandwidth of the signals it may handle. (In general, the wider the bandwidth, the better the performance. However, bandwidth that is too wide can pass excessive noise with the signal.) Baud — The speed of data transmission, often in bits per second or megabits per second. Bit rate — The number of bits that are conveyed or processed per unit of time. Bit rate is quantified using the bits per second (bit / s) unit, often in conjunction with an SI prefix such as kilo- (kbit / s or kbps), mega- (Mbit / s or Mbps), or giga- (Gbit / s or Gbps).

SMP 300 Series • Glossary 151 Channel — A group of inputs that the encoder treats as a single input because only one input in the group can be selected and active at a time. One video input and one audio input signal are selected per channel and passed on to the encoder. For the SMP 352 there are two input channels: • Channel A groups inputs 1 (HDMI) and 2 (HDMI) together. • Channel B groups inputs 3 (component or composite video), 4 (HDMI), and 5 (3G/HD/SDI) together. In composite mode, depending on layout configuration, one or both channels can be encoded (together with a background image and metadata) and incorporated into the output stream. Codec — (1) Coder/decoder: A device that converts analog video and audio signals into a digital format for transmission over telecommunications facilities and also converts received digital signals back into analog format. It may also dial up the connection, like a modem for teleconferencing. (2) Compressor/decompressor: Codecs can be implemented in software, hardware, or a combination of both. Composite encoding mode — The SMP 300 Series mode that signals from channels A and B are combined into one archive stream (forming a single recording). This is the only mode available in the SMP 351 and SMP 351 3G-SDI. Composite encoding is the alternative to dual channel encoding mode signals from channel A and signals from channel B are encoded to separate archive streams (and, therefore, separate recordings), each with its own settings. SMP 352 Series models and SMP 351 Series models with LinkLicense offer both dual channel encoding and composite encoding. Compression — The art and science of reducing the amount of data required to represent a picture or a stream of pictures and sound before sending or storing it. Compression systems are designed to eliminate redundant or repeated information to the desired data level while allowing the original information to be reproduced to the desired quality. Confidence stream — The encoding stream used for video previews, as in the AV Controls panel, and also for streaming. For composite encoding mode, signals for the confidence stream are encoded at or below the resolution or refresh rate of the archive encoding stream. The confidence stream uses the same audio settings as the archive stream, but the video encoding differs. Constant Bit Rate (CBR) — Constant bit rate encoding means that the rate at which codec output data is consumed is constant. CBR is useful for streaming multimedia content on data communication channels which operate more efficiently or require the bit rate to remain within a tight tolerance. Typically the constant bit rate is created by stuffing bits into a variable bit rate signal which has a defined peak or maximum limit. Constrained Variable Bit Rate (CVBR) — This scheme is similar to Variable Bit Rate (VBR), (see page 158) but sets a maximum allowed bit rate that the encoder cannot exceed. Darwin Streaming Server (DSS) — Darwin Streaming Server is software developed by Apple that provides a high performance media streaming server for delivering content. The software is used to simultaneously stream to a broad range of screens and devices (including computers, televisions, smartphones, and tablets). Data bits — The number of bits used to represent one character of data. Data bits can be 7, 8, or 16, but most serial devices use 8 bits for ASCII characters. DB ID — DB ID is the database identification number of a scheduled recording event. The number appears in the event details within the Scheduled Events page. To determine the event ID for a recording event, click on the Scheduled Events tab, locate and click on the event in the calendar. The ID number appears in the Event Details dialog box. Troubleshooting logs can be sorted or filtered by the event ID number.

SMP 300 Series • Glossary 152 DDC — Display Data Channel (DDC) is a bidirectional communications standard developed by VESA (Video Electronics Standards Association) that defines a universal data transmission standard for the connectivity between display devices and computers. Decoder — 1) In analog video, a device used to separate the RGBS (red, green, blue and sync) signals from a composite video signal. Also known as an NTSC decoder. 2) In digital systems, a device which does the reverse of an encoder, undoing the encoding so that the original information can be retrieved. The same method used to encode is usually just reversed in order to decode. Video over IP decoders accept IP data streams and output an analog or digital video signal. 3) In control systems, the device in a synchronizer or which reads the encoded signal and turns it into a form of control. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) — A network protocol that enables a server to automatically assign unique network addresses (IP address, subnet mask, gateway) to a device using a defined range of numbers configured for the network. DiffServe (Differentiated Services) — DiffServ specifies a scalable, coarse-grained mechanism for classifying and managing network traffic and providing quality of service (QoS). Domain Name System (DNS) — A database system that translates domain names (such as www.extron.com) into IP addresses. Dual channel encoding mode — The SMP 300 Series mode that signals from channel A and signals from channel B are encoded to separate archive streams (and, therefore, separate recordings), each with its own settings. SMP 352 Series models and SMP 351 Series models with LinkLicense offer both dual channel encoding and composite encoding. Dual channel encoding, the alternative to composite encoding mode, signals from channels A and B are combined into one archive stream (forming a single recording). All models offer composite encoding mode. Dynamic IP address — An IP address that is automatically assigned to a client device in a TCP/IP network, typically by a DHCP server. Network devices that serve multiple users, such as servers and printers, are usually assigned a static (unchanging) IP address. Extended Display Identification Data (EDID) — A data structure used to communicate video display information, including native resolution and vertical interval refresh rate requirements, to a source device over the Display Device Channel (DDC). The source device outputs the optimal video format for the display based on the provided EDID, ensuring proper video image quality. EDID Minder — Automatically manages EDID communication between connected devices. Elementary Stream — Raw H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC) (see page 154) video or raw AAC audio (see page 151), not wrapped by additional headers. Encoder — A hardware device or software program used to compress (encode) or change a signal from one format to another or convert an analog signal into a digital data stream. The SMP 300 Series is an encoder that converts analog audio and video into digital streams. Ethernet — A Local Area Network (LAN) standard officially known as IEEE 802.3. Ethernet and LAN technology are used for interconnecting computers, printers, workstations, terminals, services, and similar devices, within the same building or campus. Ethernet operates over twisted pair and over coaxial cable at speeds starting at 10 Mbps. For LAN interconnectivity, Ethernet is a physical link and data link protocol reflecting the two lowest layers of the OSI Reference Model. File Transfer Protocol (FTP) — A protocol that is used to transfer files from one host to another host over a TCP-based network (such as the Internet). Also see Secure File Transport Protocol (SFTP) on page 156 for more information.

SMP 300 Series • Glossary 153 Gateway — A router or proxy server between networks, or a network node equipped to interface with another network that uses different protocols (an entrance and exit into a communications network). Group of Pictures (GOP) — A group of successive pictures within a coded video stream. A GOP begins with an Intraframe (I-frame) (see page 155) containing the full spatial resolution and data of a video frame. Predictive frames (P-frames) (see page 156) follow I-frames and contain data that has changed from the preceding I-frame. Bi-predictive frames (B-frames) (see page 151) reference frames before and after the current frame. H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC) — H.264/MPEG-4 Part 10. A block oriented, motion-compression- based codec standard developed by the ITU-T Video Coding Experts Group (VCEG) together with the ISO / IEC Moving Picture Experts Group (MPEG). HDCP — High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection. HDCP is a digital rights management scheme developed by Intel® to prevent the copying of digital video and audio content. HDCP is mandatory for the HDMI interface, optional for DVI. HDCP defines three basic system components: source, sink, and repeater. HDMI — High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI®): an interface for the digital transmission of high definition video, multi-channel audio, and control signals, over a single cable. (NOTE: The SMP transmits 2-channel digital audio only.) HDTV — High definition television with a resolution of 1080p (1920x1080p), 720p (1280x720p), or 1080i (1920x1080i). HDTV 1080p/60 — High definition television displayed at 1920x1080 resolution (1080p; 2,073,600 pixels) with a refresh rate of 60 Hz. Hop — In a packet-switching network, a hop is the trip a data packet takes from one router (or intermediate point) to another in the network. Host name — This is a unique name by which a device is known on a network. It identifies a particular host in electronic communication. Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) — A network protocol based on TCP/IP that is used to retrieve hypertext objects from remote web pages and allows servers to transfer and display web content to users. Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Sockets Layer (HTTPS) — A networking protocol that allows web servers to transfer and display web content to users securely. All transferred data is encrypted so that only the recipient is able to access and read the content. It is not a protocol itself, but rather a combination of Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) on top of the SSL/TLS protocol, which adds the security capabilities of SSL/TLS to standard HTTP communications. iCalendar file — An iCalendar file is a file containing schedule, task, or meeting information in a standard format. iCalendar files work independent of transport protocol and can be used cross-platform to share calendar data. Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) — A TCP/IP communications protocol used by hosts and adjacent routers on a network to establish multicast group memberships. When the SMP 300 Series is connected to a streaming media server, the IGMP multicast protocol is used to pull RTSP streams. The IGMP multicast protocol conserves network bandwidth because the streaming media server only connects to the SMP 300 Series when the connection to the streaming media server is made by the user. All network switches and routing equipment must be properly configured to support IGMP snooping and IGMP query to avoid flooding all endpoints with unnecessary streaming traffic. Internet Protocol (IP) — The primary protocol that establishes the Internet. It defines addressing methods and structures for datagram encapsulation, allowing delivery of packets from a source to a destination across an internetwork based purely on addressing.

SMP 300 Series • Glossary 154 Intraframe (I-frame) — In video compression schemes, intraframes (I-frames) are primary frames that contain the full spatial resolution and data of a video frame. IP address — A numerical label using the Internet Protocol assigned to devices in a network. The IP address for the source and destination are included in an IP datagram. A unique, 32-bit binary number (12-digit dotted decimal notation — xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) based on version 4 of the Internet Protocol (IPv4) that identifies each sender and each receiver of information connected to a LAN, WAN, or the Internet. IP addresses can be static (see Static IP Address on page 157) or dynamic (see DHCP on page 153). Java™ — A class-based, object oriented developed at Sun Microsystems®, Inc. (merged with Oracle® Corporation). Programs written in Java can run on multiple platforms. JavaScript® — A scripting programming language adding interactive features to web pages. LAN — Local Area Network. A computer network that connects devices in a limited area, such as a building or campus, using network equipment that does not include leased communications lines. Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) — The maximum packet size allowed in a network data packet. Media Access Control (MAC) — A unique hardware number given to devices that connect to the Internet. When your computer or networking device (such as a router, hub, or interface) is connected to the Internet, a table (see ARP on page 151) relates the IP address of the device to its corresponding physical address on the LAN (see page 155). This protocol allows for several terminals or network nodes to communicate within a multi- point network, typically a local area network. Metadata — A metadata record consists of attributes to describe another object. The Dublin Core Metadata Element Set contains 15 generic elements for describing resources: Contributor, Publisher, Title, Data, Language, Format, Subject, Description, Identifier, Relation, Source, Type, Coverage, and Rights. MPEG-2 — The video compression algorithm used for DVD-Video, Digital Broadcast Satellite (DBS), and Digital TV (including HDTV) delivery systems. MPEG-4 — A patented collection of methods defining compression of audio and visual (AV) digital data. MPEG-4 allows higher amounts of data compression and encoding efficiency than MPEG-2. It also includes support for digital rights management and for interactive multimedia applications. MPEG-4 uses include compression of AV data for streaming media on the web; CD, HD DVD, or Blu-Ray Disc distribution; voice (telephone, videophone) distribution; and broadcast television applications. Multicast — A network technology for the delivery of information to a group of destinations simultaneously. A single stream is sent from the source to a group of devices at the same time in one transmission. Delivery is managed by network switches using the most efficient strategy to deliver the messages over each link of the network only once, and creating copies only when the links to the group of destinations split. Network Address Translation (NAT) — A network protocol that allows multiple devices to have their own, individual, private addresses, but they share one public IP address (IPv4) for connection to the internet or other networks. Network Time Protocol (NTP) — A protocol used for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems over networks. Opencast Server — An Opencast server is an open-source platform to support the management of audio and video content in the education market. Institutions can use an Opencast server to produce, manage, and distribute lecture recordings.

SMP 300 Series • Glossary 155 Overscan — An applied “zoom” on SMPTE inputs (NTSC, PAL, 480p, 576p, 720p,1080i,1080p) to hide closed caption/ancillary data, edge effects, or other video artifacts. Parity (or Parity checking) — An error detection technique that tests the integrity of the digital data being sent. Parity can be set to None, Even, or Odd. Predictive frame (P-frame) — In video compression schemes, predictive frames follow I-frames and contain data that has changed from the preceding I-frame (see page 155). Presenter — A person who makes recordings using the SMP, regardless of their login role (user or administrator). When the Record button is pressed in the AV Controls panel, the Start an Adhoc Recording pop-up window opens, where you can enter the name of the presenter in the Presenter field. The name of the presenter is stored with the metadata for the recording, and it appears in the Creator column of the Scheduled Events > Recording Calendar > List View table. If recordings are uploaded from the SMP to an Opencast, or Kaltura system, and if that presenter is a user of that publishing system, the presenter or creator name is used to sort or tag that recording. Pull streaming — Streaming method that allows users to search for content. Users specify a content source and initiate a download or view the stream. The content streaming is initiated by the end user (at the decoder rather than at the encoder). Push streaming — A streaming method where the encoder sends content out to one (unicast) or more (multicast) decoders using one of the transport protocols. Content streaming is initiated at the encoder. Quality of Service (QoS) — The grade of performance, such as transmission rates and error rates, of a communications channel or system. QoS provides a level of predictability and control beyond the best-effort delivery that the router provides by default (best- effort service provides packet transmission with no assurance of reliability, delay, jitter, or throughput). Real-time Messaging Protocol (RTMP) — An application level protocol, owned by Adobe, designed for transmission of audio, video, and data over TCP. Real-time Streaming Protocol (RTSP) — A network control protocol designed for use in audio visual and communications systems to control streaming media. Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) — An Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) standard for streaming real-time multimedia over IP in packets. Router — A network device that forwards packets from one network to another. Secondary storage mode — The SMP setting in which recordings are saved to two storage drives rather than one. This is the alternative to single storage mode (see Single Storage Mode on the next page). Secure File Transfer Protocol (SFTP) — Similar to FTP, this protocol adds encryption and requires credentials for file transfers. Secure Shell (SSH) — A network protocol that creates a secure channel used for secure communication between two computers on a network. SSH is typically used for data communication, remote shell (login) services, or command execution. Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) — A protocol used by web servers and web browsers that creates a uniquely encrypted channel for private communications over the public Internet. Session Announcement Protocol (SAP) — Used by source devices (encoders or servers) in conjunction with SDP to publicize the availability of a stream to decoders and players. The SAP periodically broadcasts session description information on an industry standard multicast address and port. When received by remote clients, these announcements can be used to facilitate the viewing of streams, eliminating the need for user configuration.

SMP 300 Series • Glossary 156 Session Description Protocol (SDP) — This protocol is used to describe streaming media initialization parameters. It covers session announcement, session invitation, media type and format, and other forms of multimedia session initiation (as defined in RFC 2327). SDP does not deliver media itself. It simply details the stream parameters and how the stream is started. Simple Instruction Set (SIS) — A set of commands developed by Extron that allows for RS-232, USB, and TCP / IP control of certain Extron products. A command is sent from the control device to the product (using a minimal number of characters) and a response is received from the product and shown on the display of the control device. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) — An application-layer protocol that facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices. This protocol collects (and configures) information from network devices (such as servers, hubs, switches, and routers) on an Internet Protocol (IP) network. Single Storage Mode — The SMP setting in which recordings are saved to only one storage drive. This is the alternative to secondary storage mode (see Secondary Storage Mode on the previous page). Static IP address — An IP address specifically assigned to a device or system in a network configuration. This type of address requires manual configuration of the network device or system and can only be changed manually or by enabling DHCP (see page 153). Stop bits — The bit or bits transmitted that signal the end of a character. Typically set to 1. Streaming media (stream) — Multimedia that is constantly received by (and normally presented to) an end-user while being delivered by a streaming provider. Internet television is a commonly streamed medium. Switch — A network switch enables communication between devices in a network by routing data between ports at the data link layer (layer 2 of the OSI model). A managed switch can be configured to transmit data only to the specific device for which the data was meant. Telnet port — Most controllers support Telnet and use port 23 as the communication port to receive or issue commands. Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) — A protocol developed for the Internet that provides reliable end-to-end data packet delivery from one network device to another. Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) — The communication protocol of the Internet. Computers and devices with direct access to the Internet are provided with a copy of the TCP/IP program to allow them to send and receive information in an understandable form. Time To Live (TTL) — A value that specifies the number of router hops multicast traffic can make between routed domains when it exits a source. TMDS — Transition Minimized Differential Signaling. An all-digital video transmission standard developed by Silicon Image, Inc. TMDS is the core technology used in DVI and HDMI.

SMP 300 Series • Glossary 157 Transport Streams (TS) — A form of media wrapped in MPEG‑2 transport stream headers. The MPEG‑2 transport headers contain information about the media. The SMP is compatible with transport streams that contain H.264 encoded video and AAC encoded audio. Transport streams containing MPEG-2 video and AC3 audio are not supported. • TS/UDP — (Unicast or multicast) An MPEG‑2 transport stream containing the elementary streams for the audio and video. It is sent using UDP packets. • TS/RTP — (Unicast or multicast) Transport stream that is sent using RTP/UDP. RTP provides sequencing information; if the sequencing information is reordered by the network, RTP reorganizes and processes the information in the correct order. UDP would process the sequencing information out of order, making RTP performance better on larger, many hop networks. Unicast — Sending messages from one device to a single network destination on a network. Having N clients of a unicast stream requires the server to produce N streams of unicast data. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) — A connectionless, transport layer protocol that sends packets (datagrams) across networks using “best-effort” delivery. It is a relatively simple protocol that does not include handshaking. Variable Bit Rate (VBR) — A compression scheme that adjusts the output bit rate around a specified target bit rate depending on the audio or image complexity. More bandwidth is used when the video frame is more complex and less bandwidth is used when the video frame is simple.

SMP 300 Series • Glossary 158 Extron Warranty

Extron Electronics warrants this product against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three years from the date of purchase. In the event of malfunction during the warranty period attributable directly to faulty workmanship and/or materials, Extron Electronics will, at its option, repair or replace said products or components, to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore said product to proper operating condition, provided that it is returned within the warranty period, with proof of purchase and description of malfunction to: USA, Canada, South America, Asia: Japan: and Central America: Extron Asia Pte Ltd Extron Electronics, Japan Extron Electronics 135 Joo Seng Road, #04-01 Kyodo Building, 16 Ichibancho 1230 South Lewis Street PM Industrial Bldg. Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 102-0082 Anaheim, CA 92805 Singapore 368363 Japan U.S.A. Singapore

Europe: China: Middle East: Extron Europe Extron China Extron Middle East Hanzeboulevard 10 686 Ronghua Road Dubai Airport Free Zone 3825 PH Amersfoort Songjiang District F13, PO Box 293666 The Netherlands Shanghai 201611 United Arab Emirates, Dubai China Africa: Extron South Africa South Tower 160 Jan Smuts Avenue Rosebank 2196, South Africa

This Limited Warranty does not apply if the fault has been caused by misuse, improper handling care, electrical or mechanical abuse, abnormal operating conditions, or if modifications were made to the product that were not authorized by Extron.

NOTE: If a product is defective, please call Extron and ask for an Application Engineer to receive an RA (Return Authorization) number. This will begin the repair process.

USA: 714.491.1500 or 800.633.9876 Asia: 65.6383.4400 Europe: 31.33.453.4040 or 800.3987.6673 Japan: 81.3.3511.7655 Africa: 27.11.447.6162 Middle East: 971.4.299.1800

Units must be returned insured, with shipping charges prepaid. If not insured, you assume the risk of loss or damage during shipment. Returned units must include the serial number and a description of the problem, as well as the name of the person to contact in case there are any questions. Extron Electronics makes no further warranties either expressed or implied with respect to the product and its quality, performance, merchantability, or fitness for any particular use. In no event will Extron Electronics be liable for direct, indirect, or consequential damages resulting from any defect in this product even if Extron Electronics has been advised of such damage. Please note that laws vary from state to state and country to country, and that some provisions of this warranty may not apply to you.

Contact Information

Worldwide Headquarters: Extron USA West, 1025 E. Ball Road, Anaheim, CA 92905, 800.633.9876